Search Results

Search found 14713 results on 589 pages for 'release upgrade'.

facebook twitter digg google delicious technorati stumbleupon myspace wordpress linkedin gmail igoogle windows live tumblr viadeo yahoo buzz yahoo mail yahoo bookmarks favorites email print

Page 586/589 | < Previous Page | 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589  | Next Page >

  • Can't make AWUS036H work in Ubuntu 12.10

    - by sfrj
    I am using 64 bit Ubuntu 12.10. This is my kernel version: Linux 3.5.0-19-generic #30-Ubuntu SMP Tue Nov 13 17:48:01 UTC 2012 x86_64 x86_64 x86_64 GNU/Linux My wireless card is an AWUSU36H The first thing I do to install the driver is copy the driver from the CD to the Downloads folder. cd /media/me/AWUS036H/Drivers/RTL8187L/Unix (Linux)/Linux driver for kernel 2.6.X$ cp rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007.tar.gz ~/Downloads/ Then I extract the tar tar xvfz rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007.tar.gz I navigate into the extracted folder, and I try to follow the instructions in the Readme.txt cd rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007 This are the contents of the folder: drv.tar.gz makedrv stack.tar.gz wlan0rmv ieee80211 ReadMe.txt wlan0dhcp wlan0up ifcfg-wlan0 rtl8187 wlan0down wpa_supplicant-0.4.9 This is what the Readme.txt says: Release Date: 2006-02-09, ver 1.2^M RTL8187 Linux driver version 1.2^M ^M --This driver supports RealTek RTL8187 Wireless LAN driver for ^M Fedora Core 2/3/4/5, Debian 3.1, Mandrake 10.2/Mandriva 2006, ^M SUSE 9.3/10.1/10.2, Gentoo 3.1, etc.^M - Support Client mode for either infrastructure or adhoc mode^M - Support WEP and WPAPSK connection^M ^M < Component >^M The driver is composed of several parts:^M 1. Module source code^M stack.tar.gz^M drv.tar.gz^M ^M 2. Script ot build the modules^M makedrv^M ^M 3. Script to load/unload modules^M wlan0up^M wlan0down ^M ^M 4. Script and configuration for DHCP^M "ReadMe.txt" [readonly] 140 lines, 4590 characters So what I do know is extract both of the compressed files: sudo tar xvfz drv.tar.gz sudo tar xvfz stack.tar.gz This 2 commands will add some data to the folders ieee80211 and rtl8187 At this point I get lost, and I don't know what to do. If I go in each of this 2 folders and I run the sudo make command then I get errors like this one: sudo makemake -C /lib/modules/3.5.0-19-generic/build M=/home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/rtl8187 modules make[1]: Entering directory `/usr/src/linux-headers-3.5.0-19-generic' CC [M] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/rtl8187/r8187_core.o In file included from /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/rtl8187/r8187_core.c:64:0: /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/rtl8187/r8187.h:29:26: fatal error: linux/config.h: No such file or directory compilation terminated. make[2]: *** [/home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/rtl8187/r8187_core.o] Error 1 make[1]: *** [_module_/home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/rtl8187] Error 2 make[1]: Leaving directory `/usr/src/linux-headers-3.5.0-19-generic' make: *** [modules] Error 2 If I try to run any of the script ./makedrv that the instructions describe, then I also get an error: ~/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007$ sudo ./makedrv [sudo] password for me: ieee80211/ ieee80211/license ieee80211/ieee80211_crypt.c ieee80211/ieee80211_tx.c ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac_wx.c ieee80211/ieee80211_module.c ieee80211/ieee80211_crypt_ccmp.c ieee80211/ieee80211_rx.c ieee80211/tags ieee80211/ieee80211_crypt_tkip.c ieee80211/Makefile ieee80211/readme ieee80211/.tmp_versions/ ieee80211/.tmp_versions/ieee80211-rtl.mod ieee80211/.tmp_versions/ieee80211_crypt_wep-rtl.mod ieee80211/.tmp_versions/ieee80211_crypt_tkip-rtl.mod ieee80211/.tmp_versions/ieee80211_crypt-rtl.mod ieee80211/.tmp_versions/ieee80211_crypt_ccmp-rtl.mod ieee80211/ieee80211_crypt_wep.c ieee80211/ieee80211.h ieee80211/ieee80211_wx.c ieee80211/ieee80211_crypt.h rtl8187/ rtl8187/license rtl8187/r8180_rtl8225z2.c rtl8187/r8180_rtl8225.h rtl8187/r8187_led.c rtl8187/r8180_93cx6.h rtl8187/r8180_wx.h rtl8187/r8180_hw.h rtl8187/copying rtl8187/r8187_led.h rtl8187/r8180_pm.h rtl8187/tags rtl8187/r8187.h rtl8187/Makefile rtl8187/r8180_rtl8225.c rtl8187/readme rtl8187/install rtl8187/.tmp_versions/ rtl8187/.tmp_versions/r8187.mod rtl8187/changes rtl8187/r8180_wx.c rtl8187/r8180_pm.c rtl8187/r8187_core.c rtl8187/r8180_93cx6.c rtl8187/authors rtl8187/ieee80211.h rtl8187/ieee80211_crypt.h rm -f *.mod.c *.mod *.o .*.cmd *.ko *~ rm -rf /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/tmp make -C /lib/modules/3.5.0-19-generic/build M=/home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211 modules make[1]: Entering directory `/usr/src/linux-headers-3.5.0-19-generic' CC [M] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.o In file included from /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:17:0: /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211.h:1019:24: error: field ‘ps_task’ has incomplete type /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c: In function ‘ieee80211_softmac_scan_wq’: /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:421:2: warning: passing argument 2 of ‘queue_delayed_work’ from incompatible pointer type [enabled by default] In file included from include/linux/srcu.h:32:0, from include/linux/notifier.h:15, from /usr/src/linux-headers-3.5.0-19-generic/arch/x86/include/asm/uprobes.h:26, from include/linux/uprobes.h:35, from include/linux/mm_types.h:15, from include/linux/kmemcheck.h:4, from include/linux/skbuff.h:18, from include/linux/if_ether.h:134, from /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211.h:26, from /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:17: include/linux/workqueue.h:371:12: note: expected ‘struct delayed_work *’ but argument is of type ‘struct work_struct *’ /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c: In function ‘ieee80211_softmac_stop_scan’: /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:495:3: warning: passing argument 1 of ‘cancel_delayed_work’ from incompatible pointer type [enabled by default] In file included from include/linux/srcu.h:32:0, from include/linux/notifier.h:15, from /usr/src/linux-headers-3.5.0-19-generic/arch/x86/include/asm/uprobes.h:26, from include/linux/uprobes.h:35, from include/linux/mm_types.h:15, from include/linux/kmemcheck.h:4, from include/linux/skbuff.h:18, from include/linux/if_ether.h:134, from /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211.h:26, from /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:17: include/linux/workqueue.h:410:20: note: expected ‘struct delayed_work *’ but argument is of type ‘struct work_struct *’ /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c: In function ‘ieee80211_associate_abort’: /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:915:2: warning: passing argument 2 of ‘queue_delayed_work’ from incompatible pointer type [enabled by default] In file included from include/linux/srcu.h:32:0, from include/linux/notifier.h:15, from /usr/src/linux-headers-3.5.0-19-generic/arch/x86/include/asm/uprobes.h:26, from include/linux/uprobes.h:35, from include/linux/mm_types.h:15, from include/linux/kmemcheck.h:4, from include/linux/skbuff.h:18, from include/linux/if_ether.h:134, from /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211.h:26, from /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:17: include/linux/workqueue.h:371:12: note: expected ‘struct delayed_work *’ but argument is of type ‘struct work_struct *’ /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c: In function ‘ieee80211_rx_frame_softmac’: /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:1527:3: error: implicit declaration of function ‘tasklet_schedule’ [-Werror=implicit-function-declaration] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c: In function ‘ieee80211_stop_protocol_rtl’: /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2120:2: warning: passing argument 1 of ‘cancel_delayed_work’ from incompatible pointer type [enabled by default] In file included from include/linux/srcu.h:32:0, from include/linux/notifier.h:15, from /usr/src/linux-headers-3.5.0-19-generic/arch/x86/include/asm/uprobes.h:26, from include/linux/uprobes.h:35, from include/linux/mm_types.h:15, from include/linux/kmemcheck.h:4, from include/linux/skbuff.h:18, from include/linux/if_ether.h:134, from /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211.h:26, from /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:17: include/linux/workqueue.h:410:20: note: expected ‘struct delayed_work *’ but argument is of type ‘struct work_struct *’ /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c: In function ‘ieee80211_softmac_init’: /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2229:78: error: macro "INIT_WORK" passed 3 arguments, but takes just 2 /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2229:2: error: ‘INIT_WORK’ undeclared (first use in this function) /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2229:2: note: each undeclared identifier is reported only once for each function it appears in /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2230:88: error: macro "INIT_WORK" passed 3 arguments, but takes just 2 /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2231:94: error: macro "INIT_WORK" passed 3 arguments, but takes just 2 /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2232:96: error: macro "INIT_WORK" passed 3 arguments, but takes just 2 /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2233:82: error: macro "INIT_WORK" passed 3 arguments, but takes just 2 /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2234:82: error: macro "INIT_WORK" passed 3 arguments, but takes just 2 /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2244:2: error: implicit declaration of function ‘tasklet_init’ [-Werror=implicit-function-declaration] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c: In function ‘ieee80211_softmac_free’: /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2255:2: warning: passing argument 1 of ‘cancel_delayed_work’ from incompatible pointer type [enabled by default] In file included from include/linux/srcu.h:32:0, from include/linux/notifier.h:15, from /usr/src/linux-headers-3.5.0-19-generic/arch/x86/include/asm/uprobes.h:26, from include/linux/uprobes.h:35, from include/linux/mm_types.h:15, from include/linux/kmemcheck.h:4, from include/linux/skbuff.h:18, from include/linux/if_ether.h:134, from /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211.h:26, from /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:17: include/linux/workqueue.h:410:20: note: expected ‘struct delayed_work *’ but argument is of type ‘struct work_struct *’ /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c: In function ‘ieee80211_wpa_set_encryption’: /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2489:3: error: implicit declaration of function ‘request_module’ [-Werror=implicit-function-declaration] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2518:3: error: implicit declaration of function ‘try_module_get’ [-Werror=implicit-function-declaration] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c: At top level: /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2663:1: warning: data definition has no type or storage class [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2663:1: warning: type defaults to ‘int’ in declaration of ‘EXPORT_SYMBOL’ [-Wimplicit-int] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2663:1: warning: parameter names (without types) in function declaration [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2664:1: warning: data definition has no type or storage class [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2664:1: warning: type defaults to ‘int’ in declaration of ‘EXPORT_SYMBOL’ [-Wimplicit-int] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2664:1: warning: parameter names (without types) in function declaration [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2665:1: warning: data definition has no type or storage class [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2665:1: warning: type defaults to ‘int’ in declaration of ‘EXPORT_SYMBOL’ [-Wimplicit-int] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2665:1: warning: parameter names (without types) in function declaration [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2666:1: warning: data definition has no type or storage class [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2666:1: warning: type defaults to ‘int’ in declaration of ‘EXPORT_SYMBOL’ [-Wimplicit-int] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2666:1: warning: parameter names (without types) in function declaration [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2667:1: warning: data definition has no type or storage class [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2667:1: warning: type defaults to ‘int’ in declaration of ‘EXPORT_SYMBOL’ [-Wimplicit-int] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2667:1: warning: parameter names (without types) in function declaration [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2668:1: warning: data definition has no type or storage class [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2668:1: warning: type defaults to ‘int’ in declaration of ‘EXPORT_SYMBOL’ [-Wimplicit-int] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2668:1: warning: parameter names (without types) in function declaration [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2669:1: warning: data definition has no type or storage class [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2669:1: warning: type defaults to ‘int’ in declaration of ‘EXPORT_SYMBOL’ [-Wimplicit-int] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2669:1: warning: parameter names (without types) in function declaration [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2670:1: warning: data definition has no type or storage class [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2670:1: warning: type defaults to ‘int’ in declaration of ‘EXPORT_SYMBOL’ [-Wimplicit-int] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2670:1: warning: parameter names (without types) in function declaration [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2671:1: warning: data definition has no type or storage class [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2671:1: warning: type defaults to ‘int’ in declaration of ‘EXPORT_SYMBOL’ [-Wimplicit-int] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2671:1: warning: parameter names (without types) in function declaration [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2672:1: warning: data definition has no type or storage class [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2672:1: warning: type defaults to ‘int’ in declaration of ‘EXPORT_SYMBOL’ [-Wimplicit-int] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2672:1: warning: parameter names (without types) in function declaration [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2673:1: warning: data definition has no type or storage class [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2673:1: warning: type defaults to ‘int’ in declaration of ‘EXPORT_SYMBOL’ [-Wimplicit-int] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2673:1: warning: parameter names (without types) in function declaration [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2674:1: warning: data definition has no type or storage class [enabled by default] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2674:1: warning: type defaults to ‘int’ in declaration of ‘EXPORT_SYMBOL’ [-Wimplicit-int] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:2674:1: warning: parameter names (without types) in function declaration [enabled by default] In file included from /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.c:17:0: /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211.h:1212:37: warning: ‘netdev_priv’ is static but used in inline function ‘ieee80211_priv’ which is not static [enabled by default] cc1: some warnings being treated as errors make[2]: *** [/home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211/ieee80211_softmac.o] Error 1 make[1]: *** [_module_/home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/ieee80211] Error 2 make[1]: Leaving directory `/usr/src/linux-headers-3.5.0-19-generic' make: *** [modules] Error 2 rm -f *.mod.c *.mod *.o .*.cmd *.ko *~ rm -rf /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/rtl8187/tmp make -C /lib/modules/3.5.0-19-generic/build M=/home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/rtl8187 modules make[1]: Entering directory `/usr/src/linux-headers-3.5.0-19-generic' CC [M] /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/rtl8187/r8187_core.o In file included from /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/rtl8187/r8187_core.c:64:0: /home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/rtl8187/r8187.h:29:26: fatal error: linux/config.h: No such file or directory compilation terminated. make[2]: *** [/home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/rtl8187/r8187_core.o] Error 1 make[1]: *** [_module_/home/me/Downloads/rtl8187_linux_26.1025.0328.2007/rtl8187] Error 2 make[1]: Leaving directory `/usr/src/linux-headers-3.5.0-19-generic' make: *** [modules] Error 2 Can somebody give me a hand finding out what I need to do to make my wifi card work? Update This is the output of the lsusb command lsusb Bus 003 Device 002: ID 147e:1000 Upek Biometric Touchchip/Touchstrip Fingerprint Sensor Bus 001 Device 001: ID 1d6b:0002 Linux Foundation 2.0 root hub Bus 002 Device 001: ID 1d6b:0002 Linux Foundation 2.0 root hub Bus 003 Device 001: ID 1d6b:0001 Linux Foundation 1.1 root hub Bus 004 Device 001: ID 1d6b:0001 Linux Foundation 1.1 root hub

    Read the article

  • Transformation of Product Management in Telecommunications for Rapid Launch of Next Generation Products

    - by raul.goycoolea
    @font-face { font-family: "Arial"; }@font-face { font-family: "Courier New"; }@font-face { font-family: "Wingdings"; }@font-face { font-family: "Cambria"; }p.MsoNormal, li.MsoNormal, div.MsoNormal { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }a:link, span.MsoHyperlink { color: blue; text-decoration: underline; }a:visited, span.MsoHyperlinkFollowed { color: purple; text-decoration: underline; }p.MsoListParagraph, li.MsoListParagraph, div.MsoListParagraph { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt 36pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }p.MsoListParagraphCxSpFirst, li.MsoListParagraphCxSpFirst, div.MsoListParagraphCxSpFirst { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt 36pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }p.MsoListParagraphCxSpMiddle, li.MsoListParagraphCxSpMiddle, div.MsoListParagraphCxSpMiddle { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt 36pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }p.MsoListParagraphCxSpLast, li.MsoListParagraphCxSpLast, div.MsoListParagraphCxSpLast { margin: 0cm 0cm 0.0001pt 36pt; font-size: 12pt; font-family: "Times New Roman"; }div.Section1 { page: Section1; }ol { margin-bottom: 0cm; }ul { margin-bottom: 0cm; } The Telecom industry continues to evolve through disruptive products, uncertain markets, shorter product lifecycles and convergence of technologies. Today’s market has moved from network centric to consumer centric and focuses primarily on the customer experience. It has resulted in several product management challenges such as an increased complexity and volume of offerings, creating product variants, accelerating time-to-market, ability to provide multiple product views for varied stakeholders, leveraging OSS intelligence to BSS layer, product co-creation and increasing audit and security concerns for service providers. The document discusses how enterprise product management enabled by PLM-based product catalogue solutions helps to launch next generation products rapidly in the context of the Telecommunication Industry.   1.0.       Introduction   Figure 1: Business Scenario   Modern business demands the launch of complex products in a very short timeframe and effecting changes in the price plan faster without IT intervention. One of the key transformation initiatives companies are focusing on is in the area of product management transformation and operational efficiency improvement. As part of these initiatives, companies are investing in best- in-class COTs-based Product Management solutions developed on industry-wide standards.   The new COTs packages are planned to integrate with existing or new B/OSS systems to provide a strategic end-to-end agile solution for reduced time-to-market and order journey time. In addition, system rationalization is being undertaken to phase out legacy systems and migrate to strategic systems.   2.0.       An Overview of Product Management in Telecom   Product data in telecom is multi- dimensional and difficult to manage. It increased significantly due to the complexity of the product, product offerings on the converged network, increased volume of offerings, bundled offering structures and ever increasing regulatory requirements.   In addition, the shrinking product lifecycle in telecom makes it difficult to manage the dynamic product data. Mergers and acquisitions coupled with organic growth pose major challenges in product portfolio management. It is a roadblock in the journey towards becoming an agile organization.       Figure 2: Complexity in Product Management   Network Technology’ is the new dimension in telecom product management where the same products are realized through different networks i.e., Soiled network to Converged network. Consequently, the product solution is different.     Figure 3: Current Scenario - Pain Points in Product Management   The major business implications arising out of the current scenario are slow time-to-market and an inefficient process that affects innovation.   3.0. Transformation of Next Generation Product Management   Companies must focus on their Product Management Transformation Journey in the areas of:   ·       Management of single truth of product information across the organization/geographies which is currently managed in heterogeneous systems   ·       Management of the Intellectual Property (IP) on the product concept and partnership in the design of discrete components to integrate into the system   ·       Leveraging structured and unstructured product data within the extended enterprise to extract consumer insights and drive innovation   ·       Management of effective operational separation to comply with regulatory bodies   ·       Reuse of existing designs and add relevant features such as value-added services to enable effective product bundling     Figure 4: Next generation needs   PLM-based Enterprise Product Catalogue solutions efficiently address the above requirements and act as an enabler towards product management transformation and rapid product launch.   4.0. PLM-based Enterprise Product Management     Figure 5: PLM-based Enterprise Product Mastering   Enterprise Product Management (EPM) enables the business to manage complex product attributes of data in complex environments. Product Mastering helps create a 'single view' of the product by creating a business-driven, IT-supported environment where a global 'single truth record' is created, managed and reused.   4.1 The Business Case for Telco PLM-based solutions for Enterprise Product Management   ·       Telco PLM-based Product Mastering solutions provide a centralized authoring environment for product definition and control of all product data and rules   ·       PLM packages are designed to support multiple perspectives of product data (ordering perspective, billing perspective, provisioning perspective)   ·       Maintains relationships/links between different elements of the entire product definition   ·       Telco PLM packages are specialized in next generation lifecycle management requirements of products such as revision and state management, test and release management, role management and impact analysis)   ·       Takes into consideration all aspects of OSS product requirements compared to CRM product catalogue solutions where the product data managed is mostly order oriented and transactional     ·       New breed of Telco PLM packages are designed with 'open' standards such as SID and eTOM. They are interoperable, support integration frameworks such as subscription and notification.   ·       Telco PLM packages have developed good collaboration frameworks to integrate suppliers and partners into the product development value chain   4.2 Various Architectures/Approaches for Product Mastering using Telco PLM systems   4. 2.a Single Central Product Management (Mastering) Approach   Figure 6: Single Central Product Management (Master) Approach       This approach is implemented across verticals such as aerospace and automotive. It focuses on a physically centralized product master to which other sources are dependent on. The product definition data (Product bundles, service bundles, price plans, offers and discounts, product configuration rules and market campaigns) is created and maintained physically in a centralized environment. In addition, the product definition/authoring environment is centralized. The existing legacy product definition data available in CRM product catalogue, billing catalogue and the legacy product catalogue is migrated to the centralized PLM-based Enterprise Product Management solution.   Architectural changes must be made in the existing business landscape of applications to create and revise data because the applications have to refer to the central repository for approvals and validation of product configurations. It is achieved by modifying how the applications write data or how the applications can be adapted to use the rules to be managed and published.   Complete product configuration validation will be done in enterprise / central product catalogue and final configuration will be sent to the B/OSS system through the SOA compliant product distribution architecture. The approach/architecture enables greater control in terms of product data management and product data governance.   4.2.b Federated Product Management (Mastering) Architecture     Figure 7: Federated Product Management (Mastering) Architecture   In the federated product mastering approach, the basic unique product definition data (product id, description product hierarchy, basic price plans and simple product design rules) will be centrally created and will be maintained. And, the advanced product definition (Product bundling, promotions, offers & discount plans) will be created in respective down stream OSS systems. The advanced product definition (Product bundling, promotions, offers and discount plans) will be created in respective downstream OSS systems.   For example, basic product definitions such as attributes, product hierarchy and basic price plans will be created and maintained in Enterprise/Central product reference catalogue and distributed to downstream OSS systems. Respective downstream OSS systems build product bundles, promotions, advanced price plans over the basic product definition and master the advanced product definition. Central reference database accesses the respective other source product master data and assembles a point-in-time consolidated view of the product. The approach is typically adapted in some merger and acquisition scenarios where there is a low probability of a central physical authority managing the data. In addition, the migration effort in this case is minimal and there are no big architectural changes to the organization application landscape. However, this approach will not result in better product data management and data governance.   5.0 Customer Scenario – Before EPC deployment   A leading global telecommunications service provider wanted to launch a quad play and triple play service offering in the shortest possible lead time. The service provider was offering Broadband and VoIP services to customers. The company wanted to reuse a majority of the Broadband services and price plans and bundle them with new wireless and IPTV services for quad play and triple play. The challenges in launching the new service offerings were:       Figure 8: Triple Play Plan   ·       Broadband product data was stored in multiple product catalogues (CRM catalogue, Billing catalogue, spread sheets)   ·       Product managers spent a lot of time performing tasks involving duplication or re-keying of data. Manual effort caused errors, cost and time over-runs.   ·       No effective product and price data governance mechanism. Price change issues arising from the lack of data consistency across systems resulted in leakage of customer value and revenue.   ·       Product data had re-usability issues and was not in a structured format. It resulted in uncontrolled product portfolio creation and product management issues.   ·       Lack of enterprise product model resulted into product distribution challenges and thus delays in product launch.   ·       Designers are constrained by existing legacy product management solutions to model product/service requirements and product configuration rules such as upgrading, downgrading and cross selling.    5.1 Customer Scenario - After EPC deployment     Figure 9: SOA-based end-to-end EPC Solution   The company deployed PLM-based Enterprise Product Catalogue solutions to launch quad play service after evaluating various product catalogues. The broadband product offering, service and price data were migrated to the new system, and the product and price plan hierarchy for new offerings were created using the entities defined in the Enterprise Product Model. Supplier product catalogue data such as routers and set up boxes were loaded onto the new solution through SOA-based web service. Price plans and configuration rules were built in the new system. The validated final product configurations were extracted from the product catalogue in a SID format and were distributed to the downstream B/OSS systems through exposed SOA-based web services. The transformations required for the B/OSS system were handled using the transformation layer as part of the solution.   6.0 How PLM enabled Product Management Transformation         Figure 10: Product Management Transformation     PLM-based Product Catalogue Solution helped the customer reduce the product launch cycle time by 30% and enable transformation of Product Management for next generation services.   7.0 Conclusion   On the one hand, the telecom industry is undergoing changes due to disruptions, uncertain product markets and increased complexity of products. On the other hand, the ARPU is decreasing year-on-year. Communications Service Providers are embarking on convergence, bundled service offerings, flexibility to cross-sell and up-sell, introduce new value-added services, leverage Web 2.0 concepts and network capabilities. Consequently, large scale IT transformation initiatives to improve their ARPU supporting network and business transformations are a business imperative. Product Management has become a focus area. Companies are investing in best-in- class COTS solutions to reduce time-to-market, ensure rapid service delivery and improve operational efficiency. An efficient PLM-based enterprise product mastering solution plays a key role in achieving zero touch automation and rapid product launch.   References:   1.     Preston G.Smith, Donald G.Reineristsem, Van Nostrand Reinhold “Developing Products in Half the time”.   2.     John G. Innes, "Achieving Successful Product Change", Pitman Publishing.   3.     D T Pham and R M Setchi (16th Jan, 2001) "Authoring environment for documentation development" University of Wales Cardiff, U.K., Proceedings on Institution of Mechanical Engineers, Vol. 215, Part B.   4.     Oracle Product Hub for Communications:   http://www.oracle.com/us/products/applications/master-data-management/product-hub-082059.html  

    Read the article

  • Oracle BI Server Modeling, Part 1- Designing a Query Factory

    - by bob.ertl(at)oracle.com
      Welcome to Oracle BI Development's BI Foundation blog, focused on helping you get the most value from your Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition (BI EE) platform deployments.  In my first series of posts, I plan to show developers the concepts and best practices for modeling in the Common Enterprise Information Model (CEIM), the semantic layer of Oracle BI EE.  In this segment, I will lay the groundwork for the modeling concepts.  First, I will cover the big picture of how the BI Server fits into the system, and how the CEIM controls the query processing. Oracle BI EE Query Cycle The purpose of the Oracle BI Server is to bridge the gap between the presentation services and the data sources.  There are typically a variety of data sources in a variety of technologies: relational, normalized transaction systems; relational star-schema data warehouses and marts; multidimensional analytic cubes and financial applications; flat files, Excel files, XML files, and so on. Business datasets can reside in a single type of source, or, most of the time, are spread across various types of sources. Presentation services users are generally business people who need to be able to query that set of sources without any knowledge of technologies, schemas, or how sources are organized in their company. They think of business analysis in terms of measures with specific calculations, hierarchical dimensions for breaking those measures down, and detailed reports of the business transactions themselves.  Most of them create queries without knowing it, by picking a dashboard page and some filters.  Others create their own analysis by selecting metrics and dimensional attributes, and possibly creating additional calculations. The BI Server bridges that gap from simple business terms to technical physical queries by exposing just the business focused measures and dimensional attributes that business people can use in their analyses and dashboards.   After they make their selections and start the analysis, the BI Server plans the best way to query the data sources, writes the optimized sequence of physical queries to those sources, post-processes the results, and presents them to the client as a single result set suitable for tables, pivots and charts. The CEIM is a model that controls the processing of the BI Server.  It provides the subject areas that presentation services exposes for business users to select simplified metrics and dimensional attributes for their analysis.  It models the mappings to the physical data access, the calculations and logical transformations, and the data access security rules.  The CEIM consists of metadata stored in the repository, authored by developers using the Administration Tool client.     Presentation services and other query clients create their queries in BI EE's SQL-92 language, called Logical SQL or LSQL.  The API simply uses ODBC or JDBC to pass the query to the BI Server.  Presentation services writes the LSQL query in terms of the simplified objects presented to the users.  The BI Server creates a query plan, and rewrites the LSQL into fully-detailed SQL or other languages suitable for querying the physical sources.  For example, the LSQL on the left below was rewritten into the physical SQL for an Oracle 11g database on the right. Logical SQL   Physical SQL SELECT "D0 Time"."T02 Per Name Month" saw_0, "D4 Product"."P01  Product" saw_1, "F2 Units"."2-01  Billed Qty  (Sum All)" saw_2 FROM "Sample Sales" ORDER BY saw_0, saw_1       WITH SAWITH0 AS ( select T986.Per_Name_Month as c1, T879.Prod_Dsc as c2,      sum(T835.Units) as c3, T879.Prod_Key as c4 from      Product T879 /* A05 Product */ ,      Time_Mth T986 /* A08 Time Mth */ ,      FactsRev T835 /* A11 Revenue (Billed Time Join) */ where ( T835.Prod_Key = T879.Prod_Key and T835.Bill_Mth = T986.Row_Wid) group by T879.Prod_Dsc, T879.Prod_Key, T986.Per_Name_Month ) select SAWITH0.c1 as c1, SAWITH0.c2 as c2, SAWITH0.c3 as c3 from SAWITH0 order by c1, c2   Probably everybody reading this blog can write SQL or MDX.  However, the trick in designing the CEIM is that you are modeling a query-generation factory.  Rather than hand-crafting individual queries, you model behavior and relationships, thus configuring the BI Server machinery to manufacture millions of different queries in response to random user requests.  This mass production requires a different mindset and approach than when you are designing individual SQL statements in tools such as Oracle SQL Developer, Oracle Hyperion Interactive Reporting (formerly Brio), or Oracle BI Publisher.   The Structure of the Common Enterprise Information Model (CEIM) The CEIM has a unique structure specifically for modeling the relationships and behaviors that fill the gap from logical user requests to physical data source queries and back to the result.  The model divides the functionality into three specialized layers, called Presentation, Business Model and Mapping, and Physical, as shown below. Presentation services clients can generally only see the presentation layer, and the objects in the presentation layer are normally the only ones used in the LSQL request.  When a request comes into the BI Server from presentation services or another client, the relationships and objects in the model allow the BI Server to select the appropriate data sources, create a query plan, and generate the physical queries.  That's the left to right flow in the diagram below.  When the results come back from the data source queries, the right to left relationships in the model show how to transform the results and perform any final calculations and functions that could not be pushed down to the databases.   Business Model Think of the business model as the heart of the CEIM you are designing.  This is where you define the analytic behavior seen by the users, and the superset library of metric and dimension objects available to the user community as a whole.  It also provides the baseline business-friendly names and user-readable dictionary.  For these reasons, it is often called the "logical" model--it is a virtual database schema that persists no data, but can be queried as if it is a database. The business model always has a dimensional shape (more on this in future posts), and its simple shape and terminology hides the complexity of the source data models. Besides hiding complexity and normalizing terminology, this layer adds most of the analytic value, as well.  This is where you define the rich, dimensional behavior of the metrics and complex business calculations, as well as the conformed dimensions and hierarchies.  It contributes to the ease of use for business users, since the dimensional metric definitions apply in any context of filters and drill-downs, and the conformed dimensions enable dashboard-wide filters and guided analysis links that bring context along from one page to the next.  The conformed dimensions also provide a key to hiding the complexity of many sources, including federation of different databases, behind the simple business model. Note that the expression language in this layer is LSQL, so that any expression can be rewritten into any data source's query language at run time.  This is important for federation, where a given logical object can map to several different physical objects in different databases.  It is also important to portability of the CEIM to different database brands, which is a key requirement for Oracle's BI Applications products. Your requirements process with your user community will mostly affect the business model.  This is where you will define most of the things they specifically ask for, such as metric definitions.  For this reason, many of the best-practice methodologies of our consulting partners start with the high-level definition of this layer. Physical Model The physical model connects the business model that meets your users' requirements to the reality of the data sources you have available. In the query factory analogy, think of the physical layer as the bill of materials for generating physical queries.  Every schema, table, column, join, cube, hierarchy, etc., that will appear in any physical query manufactured at run time must be modeled here at design time. Each physical data source will have its own physical model, or "database" object in the CEIM.  The shape of each physical model matches the shape of its physical source.  In other words, if the source is normalized relational, the physical model will mimic that normalized shape.  If it is a hypercube, the physical model will have a hypercube shape.  If it is a flat file, it will have a denormalized tabular shape. To aid in query optimization, the physical layer also tracks the specifics of the database brand and release.  This allows the BI Server to make the most of each physical source's distinct capabilities, writing queries in its syntax, and using its specific functions. This allows the BI Server to push processing work as deep as possible into the physical source, which minimizes data movement and takes full advantage of the database's own optimizer.  For most data sources, native APIs are used to further optimize performance and functionality. The value of having a distinct separation between the logical (business) and physical models is encapsulation of the physical characteristics.  This encapsulation is another enabler of packaged BI applications and federation.  It is also key to hiding the complex shapes and relationships in the physical sources from the end users.  Consider a routine drill-down in the business model: physically, it can require a drill-through where the first query is MDX to a multidimensional cube, followed by the drill-down query in SQL to a normalized relational database.  The only difference from the user's point of view is that the 2nd query added a more detailed dimension level column - everything else was the same. Mappings Within the Business Model and Mapping Layer, the mappings provide the binding from each logical column and join in the dimensional business model, to each of the objects that can provide its data in the physical layer.  When there is more than one option for a physical source, rules in the mappings are applied to the query context to determine which of the data sources should be hit, and how to combine their results if more than one is used.  These rules specify aggregate navigation, vertical partitioning (fragmentation), and horizontal partitioning, any of which can be federated across multiple, heterogeneous sources.  These mappings are usually the most sophisticated part of the CEIM. Presentation You might think of the presentation layer as a set of very simple relational-like views into the business model.  Over ODBC/JDBC, they present a relational catalog consisting of databases, tables and columns.  For business users, presentation services interprets these as subject areas, folders and columns, respectively.  (Note that in 10g, subject areas were called presentation catalogs in the CEIM.  In this blog, I will stick to 11g terminology.)  Generally speaking, presentation services and other clients can query only these objects (there are exceptions for certain clients such as BI Publisher and Essbase Studio). The purpose of the presentation layer is to specialize the business model for different categories of users.  Based on a user's role, they will be restricted to specific subject areas, tables and columns for security.  The breakdown of the model into multiple subject areas organizes the content for users, and subjects superfluous to a particular business role can be hidden from that set of users.  Customized names and descriptions can be used to override the business model names for a specific audience.  Variables in the object names can be used for localization. For these reasons, you are better off thinking of the tables in the presentation layer as folders than as strict relational tables.  The real semantics of tables and how they function is in the business model, and any grouping of columns can be included in any table in the presentation layer.  In 11g, an LSQL query can also span multiple presentation subject areas, as long as they map to the same business model. Other Model Objects There are some objects that apply to multiple layers.  These include security-related objects, such as application roles, users, data filters, and query limits (governors).  There are also variables you can use in parameters and expressions, and initialization blocks for loading their initial values on a static or user session basis.  Finally, there are Multi-User Development (MUD) projects for developers to check out units of work, and objects for the marketing feature used by our packaged customer relationship management (CRM) software.   The Query Factory At this point, you should have a grasp on the query factory concept.  When developing the CEIM model, you are configuring the BI Server to automatically manufacture millions of queries in response to random user requests. You do this by defining the analytic behavior in the business model, mapping that to the physical data sources, and exposing it through the presentation layer's role-based subject areas. While configuring mass production requires a different mindset than when you hand-craft individual SQL or MDX statements, it builds on the modeling and query concepts you already understand. The following posts in this series will walk through the CEIM modeling concepts and best practices in detail.  We will initially review dimensional concepts so you can understand the business model, and then present a pattern-based approach to learning the mappings from a variety of physical schema shapes and deployments to the dimensional model.  Along the way, we will also present the dimensional calculation template, and learn how to configure the many additivity patterns.

    Read the article

  • Metro: Introduction to CSS 3 Grid Layout

    - by Stephen.Walther
    The purpose of this blog post is to provide you with a quick introduction to the new W3C CSS 3 Grid Layout standard. You can use CSS Grid Layout in Metro style applications written with JavaScript to lay out the content of an HTML page. CSS Grid Layout provides you with all of the benefits of using HTML tables for layout without requiring you to actually use any HTML table elements. Doing Page Layouts without Tables Back in the 1990’s, if you wanted to create a fancy website, then you would use HTML tables for layout. For example, if you wanted to create a standard three-column page layout then you would create an HTML table with three columns like this: <table height="100%"> <tr> <td valign="top" width="300px" bgcolor="red"> Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column </td> <td valign="top" bgcolor="green"> Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column </td> <td valign="top" width="300px" bgcolor="blue"> Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column </td> </tr> </table> When the table above gets rendered out to a browser, you end up with the following three-column layout: The width of the left and right columns is fixed – the width of the middle column expands or contracts depending on the width of the browser. Sometime around the year 2005, everyone decided that using tables for layout was a bad idea. Instead of using tables for layout — it was collectively decided by the spirit of the Web — you should use Cascading Style Sheets instead. Why is using HTML tables for layout bad? Using tables for layout breaks the semantics of the TABLE element. A TABLE element should be used only for displaying tabular information such as train schedules or moon phases. Using tables for layout is bad for accessibility (The Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 1.0 is explicit about this) and using tables for layout is bad for separating content from layout (see http://CSSZenGarden.com). Post 2005, anyone who used HTML tables for layout were encouraged to hold their heads down in shame. That’s all well and good, but the problem with using CSS for layout is that it can be more difficult to work with CSS than HTML tables. For example, to achieve a standard three-column layout, you either need to use absolute positioning or floats. Here’s a three-column layout with floats: <style type="text/css"> #container { min-width: 800px; } #leftColumn { float: left; width: 300px; height: 100%; background-color:red; } #middleColumn { background-color:green; height: 100%; } #rightColumn { float: right; width: 300px; height: 100%; background-color:blue; } </style> <div id="container"> <div id="rightColumn"> Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column </div> <div id="leftColumn"> Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column </div> <div id="middleColumn"> Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column </div> </div> The page above contains four DIV elements: a container DIV which contains a leftColumn, middleColumn, and rightColumn DIV. The leftColumn DIV element is floated to the left and the rightColumn DIV element is floated to the right. Notice that the rightColumn DIV appears in the page before the middleColumn DIV – this unintuitive ordering is necessary to get the floats to work correctly (see http://stackoverflow.com/questions/533607/css-three-column-layout-problem). The page above (almost) works with the most recent versions of most browsers. For example, you get the correct three-column layout in both Firefox and Chrome: And the layout mostly works with Internet Explorer 9 except for the fact that for some strange reason the min-width doesn’t work so when you shrink the width of your browser, you can get the following unwanted layout: Notice how the middle column (the green column) bleeds to the left and right. People have solved these issues with more complicated CSS. For example, see: http://matthewjamestaylor.com/blog/holy-grail-no-quirks-mode.htm But, at this point, no one could argue that using CSS is easier or more intuitive than tables. It takes work to get a layout with CSS and we know that we could achieve the same layout more easily using HTML tables. Using CSS Grid Layout CSS Grid Layout is a new W3C standard which provides you with all of the benefits of using HTML tables for layout without the disadvantage of using an HTML TABLE element. In other words, CSS Grid Layout enables you to perform table layouts using pure Cascading Style Sheets. The CSS Grid Layout standard is still in a “Working Draft” state (it is not finalized) and it is located here: http://www.w3.org/TR/css3-grid-layout/ The CSS Grid Layout standard is only supported by Internet Explorer 10 and there are no signs that any browser other than Internet Explorer will support this standard in the near future. This means that it is only practical to take advantage of CSS Grid Layout when building Metro style applications with JavaScript. Here’s how you can create a standard three-column layout using a CSS Grid Layout: <!DOCTYPE html> <html> <head> <style type="text/css"> html, body, #container { height: 100%; padding: 0px; margin: 0px; } #container { display: -ms-grid; -ms-grid-columns: 300px auto 300px; -ms-grid-rows: 100%; } #leftColumn { -ms-grid-column: 1; background-color:red; } #middleColumn { -ms-grid-column: 2; background-color:green; } #rightColumn { -ms-grid-column: 3; background-color:blue; } </style> </head> <body> <div id="container"> <div id="leftColumn"> Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column </div> <div id="middleColumn"> Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column </div> <div id="rightColumn"> Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column </div> </div> </body> </html> When the page above is rendered in Internet Explorer 10, you get a standard three-column layout: The page above contains four DIV elements: a container DIV which contains a leftColumn DIV, middleColumn DIV, and rightColumn DIV. The container DIV is set to Grid display mode with the following CSS rule: #container { display: -ms-grid; -ms-grid-columns: 300px auto 300px; -ms-grid-rows: 100%; } The display property is set to the value “-ms-grid”. This property causes the container DIV to lay out its child elements in a grid. (Notice that you use “-ms-grid” instead of “grid”. The “-ms-“ prefix is used because the CSS Grid Layout standard is still preliminary. This implementation only works with IE10 and it might change before the final release.) The grid columns and rows are defined with the “-ms-grid-columns” and “-ms-grid-rows” properties. The style rule above creates a grid with three columns and one row. The left and right columns are fixed sized at 300 pixels. The middle column sizes automatically depending on the remaining space available. The leftColumn, middleColumn, and rightColumn DIVs are positioned within the container grid element with the following CSS rules: #leftColumn { -ms-grid-column: 1; background-color:red; } #middleColumn { -ms-grid-column: 2; background-color:green; } #rightColumn { -ms-grid-column: 3; background-color:blue; } The “-ms-grid-column” property is used to specify the column associated with the element selected by the style sheet selector. The leftColumn DIV is positioned in the first grid column, the middleColumn DIV is positioned in the second grid column, and the rightColumn DIV is positioned in the third grid column. I find using CSS Grid Layout to be just as intuitive as using an HTML table for layout. You define your columns and rows and then you position different elements within these columns and rows. Very straightforward. Creating Multiple Columns and Rows In the previous section, we created a super simple three-column layout. This layout contained only a single row. In this section, let’s create a slightly more complicated layout which contains more than one row: The following page contains a header row, a content row, and a footer row. The content row contains three columns: <!DOCTYPE html> <html> <head> <style type="text/css"> html, body, #container { height: 100%; padding: 0px; margin: 0px; } #container { display: -ms-grid; -ms-grid-columns: 300px auto 300px; -ms-grid-rows: 100px 1fr 100px; } #header { -ms-grid-column: 1; -ms-grid-column-span: 3; -ms-grid-row: 1; background-color: yellow; } #leftColumn { -ms-grid-column: 1; -ms-grid-row: 2; background-color:red; } #middleColumn { -ms-grid-column: 2; -ms-grid-row: 2; background-color:green; } #rightColumn { -ms-grid-column: 3; -ms-grid-row: 2; background-color:blue; } #footer { -ms-grid-column: 1; -ms-grid-column-span: 3; -ms-grid-row: 3; background-color: orange; } </style> </head> <body> <div id="container"> <div id="header"> Header, Header, Header </div> <div id="leftColumn"> Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column, Left Column </div> <div id="middleColumn"> Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column, Middle Column </div> <div id="rightColumn"> Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column, Right Column </div> <div id="footer"> Footer, Footer, Footer </div> </div> </body> </html> In the page above, the grid layout is created with the following rule which creates a grid with three rows and three columns: #container { display: -ms-grid; -ms-grid-columns: 300px auto 300px; -ms-grid-rows: 100px 1fr 100px; } The header is created with the following rule: #header { -ms-grid-column: 1; -ms-grid-column-span: 3; -ms-grid-row: 1; background-color: yellow; } The header is positioned in column 1 and row 1. Furthermore, notice that the “-ms-grid-column-span” property is used to span the header across three columns. CSS Grid Layout and Fractional Units When you use CSS Grid Layout, you can take advantage of fractional units. Fractional units provide you with an easy way of dividing up remaining space in a page. Imagine, for example, that you want to create a three-column page layout. You want the size of the first column to be fixed at 200 pixels and you want to divide the remaining space among the remaining three columns. The width of the second column is equal to the combined width of the third and fourth columns. The following CSS rule creates four columns with the desired widths: #container { display: -ms-grid; -ms-grid-columns: 200px 2fr 1fr 1fr; -ms-grid-rows: 1fr; } The fr unit represents a fraction. The grid above contains four columns. The second column is two times the size (2fr) of the third (1fr) and fourth (1fr) columns. When you use the fractional unit, the remaining space is divided up using fractional amounts. Notice that the single row is set to a height of 1fr. The single grid row gobbles up the entire vertical space. Here’s the entire HTML page: <!DOCTYPE html> <html> <head> <style type="text/css"> html, body, #container { height: 100%; padding: 0px; margin: 0px; } #container { display: -ms-grid; -ms-grid-columns: 200px 2fr 1fr 1fr; -ms-grid-rows: 1fr; } #firstColumn { -ms-grid-column: 1; background-color:red; } #secondColumn { -ms-grid-column: 2; background-color:green; } #thirdColumn { -ms-grid-column: 3; background-color:blue; } #fourthColumn { -ms-grid-column: 4; background-color:orange; } </style> </head> <body> <div id="container"> <div id="firstColumn"> First Column, First Column, First Column </div> <div id="secondColumn"> Second Column, Second Column, Second Column </div> <div id="thirdColumn"> Third Column, Third Column, Third Column </div> <div id="fourthColumn"> Fourth Column, Fourth Column, Fourth Column </div> </div> </body> </html>   Summary There is more in the CSS 3 Grid Layout standard than discussed in this blog post. My goal was to describe the basics. If you want to learn more than you can read through the entire standard at http://www.w3.org/TR/css3-grid-layout/ In this blog post, I described some of the difficulties that you might encounter when attempting to replace HTML tables with Cascading Style Sheets when laying out a web page. I explained how you can take advantage of the CSS 3 Grid Layout standard to avoid these problems when building Metro style applications using JavaScript. CSS 3 Grid Layout provides you with all of the benefits of using HTML tables for laying out a page without requiring you to use HTML table elements.

    Read the article

  • Frequent Disconnects ubuntu desktop 12.10 x64 intel 82579V e1000e

    - by user112055
    I'm having frequent disconnects with my new install of Ubuntu 12.10. I tried updating the kernel driver to the latest intel release to no avail. My expertise is spent. It happens anywhere between 1 min and 10 min. Any ideas? syslog: Dec 1 13:51:39 andromeda kernel: [ 972.188809] audit_printk_skb: 6 callbacks suppressed Dec 1 13:51:39 andromeda kernel: [ 972.188813] type=1701 audit(1354398699.418:199): auid=4294967295 uid=1000 gid=1000 ses=4294967295 pid=6039 comm="chrome" reason="seccomp" sig=0 syscall=4 compat=0 ip=0x7f26777d9205 code=0x50000 Dec 1 13:51:39 andromeda kernel: [ 972.188817] type=1701 audit(1354398699.418:200): auid=4294967295 uid=1000 gid=1000 ses=4294967295 pid=6039 comm="chrome" reason="seccomp" sig=0 syscall=4 compat=0 ip=0x7f26777d9205 code=0x50000 Dec 1 13:51:39 andromeda kernel: [ 972.188820] type=1701 audit(1354398699.418:201): auid=4294967295 uid=1000 gid=1000 ses=4294967295 pid=6039 comm="chrome" reason="seccomp" sig=0 syscall=4 compat=0 ip=0x7f26777d9205 code=0x50000 Dec 1 13:51:39 andromeda kernel: [ 972.188823] type=1701 audit(1354398699.418:202): auid=4294967295 uid=1000 gid=1000 ses=4294967295 pid=6039 comm="chrome" reason="seccomp" sig=0 syscall=4 compat=0 ip=0x7f26777d9205 code=0x50000 Dec 1 13:51:39 andromeda kernel: [ 972.188825] type=1701 audit(1354398699.418:203): auid=4294967295 uid=1000 gid=1000 ses=4294967295 pid=6039 comm="chrome" reason="seccomp" sig=0 syscall=4 compat=0 ip=0x7f26777d9205 code=0x50000 Dec 1 13:51:39 andromeda kernel: [ 972.331419] type=1701 audit(1354398699.558:204): auid=4294967295 uid=1000 gid=1000 ses=4294967295 pid=6039 comm="chrome" reason="seccomp" sig=0 syscall=2 compat=0 ip=0x7f26777d96b0 code=0x50000 Dec 1 13:53:12 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): carrier now OFF (device state 100, deferring action for 4 seconds) Dec 1 13:53:12 andromeda kernel: [ 1064.894387] e1000e: e1000e: eth0 NIC Link is Down Dec 1 13:53:16 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): device state change: activated -> unavailable (reason 'carrier-changed') [100 20 40] Dec 1 13:53:16 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): deactivating device (reason 'carrier-changed') [40] Dec 1 13:53:16 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): canceled DHCP transaction, DHCP client pid 5946 Dec 1 13:53:16 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: Withdrawing address record for fe80::ea40:f2ff:fee2:4d86 on eth0. Dec 1 13:53:16 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: Leaving mDNS multicast group on interface eth0.IPv6 with address fe80::ea40:f2ff:fee2:4d86. Dec 1 13:53:16 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: Interface eth0.IPv6 no longer relevant for mDNS. Dec 1 13:53:16 andromeda kernel: [ 1069.025288] IPv6: ADDRCONF(NETDEV_UP): eth0: link is not ready Dec 1 13:53:16 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: Withdrawing address record for 192.168.11.17 on eth0. Dec 1 13:53:16 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: Leaving mDNS multicast group on interface eth0.IPv4 with address 192.168.11.17. Dec 1 13:53:16 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: Interface eth0.IPv4 no longer relevant for mDNS. Dec 1 13:53:16 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <warn> DNS: plugin dnsmasq update failed Dec 1 13:53:16 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> ((null)): removing resolv.conf from /sbin/resolvconf Dec 1 13:53:16 andromeda dnsmasq[1907]: setting upstream servers from DBus Dec 1 13:53:16 andromeda dbus[800]: [system] Activating service name='org.freedesktop.nm_dispatcher' (using servicehelper) Dec 1 13:53:16 andromeda dbus[800]: [system] Successfully activated service 'org.freedesktop.nm_dispatcher' Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): carrier now ON (device state 20) Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): device state change: unavailable -> disconnected (reason 'carrier-changed') [20 30 40] Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Auto-activating connection '82579V'. Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) starting connection '82579V' Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): device state change: disconnected -> prepare (reason 'none') [30 40 0] Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 1 of 5 (Device Prepare) scheduled... Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 1 of 5 (Device Prepare) started... Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 2 of 5 (Device Configure) scheduled... Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 1 of 5 (Device Prepare) complete. Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 2 of 5 (Device Configure) starting... Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): device state change: prepare -> config (reason 'none') [40 50 0] Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 2 of 5 (Device Configure) successful. Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 3 of 5 (IP Configure Start) scheduled. Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 2 of 5 (Device Configure) complete. Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 3 of 5 (IP Configure Start) started... Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): device state change: config -> ip-config (reason 'none') [50 70 0] Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Beginning DHCPv4 transaction (timeout in 45 seconds) Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda kernel: [ 1084.938042] e1000e: e1000e: eth0 NIC Link is Up 100 Mbps Full Duplex, Flow Control: Rx/Tx Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda kernel: [ 1084.938049] e1000e 0000:00:19.0: eth0: 10/100 speed: disabling TSO Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda kernel: [ 1084.938815] IPv6: ADDRCONF(NETDEV_CHANGE): eth0: link becomes ready Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> dhclient started with pid 6080 Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 3 of 5 (IP Configure Start) complete. Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda dhclient: Internet Systems Consortium DHCP Client 4.2.4 Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda dhclient: Copyright 2004-2012 Internet Systems Consortium. Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda dhclient: All rights reserved. Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda dhclient: For info, please visit https://www.isc.org/software/dhcp/ Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda dhclient: Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): DHCPv4 state changed nbi -> preinit Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda dhclient: Listening on LPF/eth0/e8:40:f2:e2:4d:86 Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda dhclient: Sending on LPF/eth0/e8:40:f2:e2:4d:86 Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda dhclient: Sending on Socket/fallback Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda dhclient: DHCPREQUEST of 192.168.11.17 on eth0 to 255.255.255.255 port 67 Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda dhclient: DHCPACK of 192.168.11.17 from 192.168.11.1 Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda dhclient: bound to 192.168.11.17 -- renewal in 33576 seconds. Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): DHCPv4 state changed preinit -> reboot Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> address 192.168.11.17 Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> prefix 24 (255.255.255.0) Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> gateway 192.168.11.1 Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> hostname 'andromeda' Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> nameserver '192.168.11.1' Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> domain name 'hsd1.ca.comcast.net' Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 5 of 5 (IPv4 Configure Commit) scheduled... Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 5 of 5 (IPv4 Commit) started... Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: Joining mDNS multicast group on interface eth0.IPv4 with address 192.168.11.17. Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: New relevant interface eth0.IPv4 for mDNS. Dec 1 13:53:32 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: Registering new address record for 192.168.11.17 on eth0.IPv4. Dec 1 13:53:33 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): device state change: ip-config -> activated (reason 'none') [70 100 0] Dec 1 13:53:33 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> ((null)): writing resolv.conf to /sbin/resolvconf Dec 1 13:53:33 andromeda dnsmasq[1907]: setting upstream servers from DBus Dec 1 13:53:33 andromeda dnsmasq[1907]: using nameserver 192.168.11.1#53 Dec 1 13:53:33 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Policy set '82579V' (eth0) as default for IPv4 routing and DNS. Dec 1 13:53:33 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) successful, device activated. Dec 1 13:53:33 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 5 of 5 (IPv4 Commit) complete. Dec 1 13:53:33 andromeda dbus[800]: [system] Activating service name='org.freedesktop.nm_dispatcher' (using servicehelper) Dec 1 13:53:33 andromeda dbus[800]: [system] Successfully activated service 'org.freedesktop.nm_dispatcher' Dec 1 13:53:33 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: Joining mDNS multicast group on interface eth0.IPv6 with address fe80::ea40:f2ff:fee2:4d86. Dec 1 13:53:33 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: New relevant interface eth0.IPv6 for mDNS. Dec 1 13:53:33 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: Registering new address record for fe80::ea40:f2ff:fee2:4d86 on eth0.*. Dec 1 13:53:41 andromeda ntpdate[6154]: adjust time server 91.189.94.4 offset 0.000928 sec Dec 1 13:53:50 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): carrier now OFF (device state 100, deferring action for 4 seconds) Dec 1 13:53:50 andromeda kernel: [ 1102.980003] e1000e: e1000e: eth0 NIC Link is Down Dec 1 13:53:54 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): device state change: activated -> unavailable (reason 'carrier-changed') [100 20 40] Dec 1 13:53:54 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): deactivating device (reason 'carrier-changed') [40] Dec 1 13:53:54 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): canceled DHCP transaction, DHCP client pid 6080 Dec 1 13:53:54 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: Withdrawing address record for fe80::ea40:f2ff:fee2:4d86 on eth0. Dec 1 13:53:54 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: Leaving mDNS multicast group on interface eth0.IPv6 with address fe80::ea40:f2ff:fee2:4d86. Dec 1 13:53:54 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: Interface eth0.IPv6 no longer relevant for mDNS. Dec 1 13:53:54 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: Withdrawing address record for 192.168.11.17 on eth0. Dec 1 13:53:54 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: Leaving mDNS multicast group on interface eth0.IPv4 with address 192.168.11.17. Dec 1 13:53:54 andromeda kernel: [ 1107.025959] IPv6: ADDRCONF(NETDEV_UP): eth0: link is not ready Dec 1 13:53:54 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <warn> DNS: plugin dnsmasq update failed Dec 1 13:53:54 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> ((null)): removing resolv.conf from /sbin/resolvconf Dec 1 13:53:54 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: Interface eth0.IPv4 no longer relevant for mDNS. Dec 1 13:53:54 andromeda dnsmasq[1907]: setting upstream servers from DBus Dec 1 13:53:54 andromeda dbus[800]: [system] Activating service name='org.freedesktop.nm_dispatcher' (using servicehelper) Dec 1 13:53:54 andromeda dbus[800]: [system] Successfully activated service 'org.freedesktop.nm_dispatcher' Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): carrier now ON (device state 20) Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): device state change: unavailable -> disconnected (reason 'carrier-changed') [20 30 40] Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Auto-activating connection '82579V'. Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) starting connection '82579V' Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): device state change: disconnected -> prepare (reason 'none') [30 40 0] Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 1 of 5 (Device Prepare) scheduled... Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 1 of 5 (Device Prepare) started... Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 2 of 5 (Device Configure) scheduled... Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 1 of 5 (Device Prepare) complete. Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 2 of 5 (Device Configure) starting... Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): device state change: prepare -> config (reason 'none') [40 50 0] Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 2 of 5 (Device Configure) successful. Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda kernel: [ 1123.167668] e1000e: e1000e: eth0 NIC Link is Up 100 Mbps Full Duplex, Flow Control: Rx/Tx Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda kernel: [ 1123.167675] e1000e 0000:00:19.0: eth0: 10/100 speed: disabling TSO Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda kernel: [ 1123.168430] IPv6: ADDRCONF(NETDEV_CHANGE): eth0: link becomes ready Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 3 of 5 (IP Configure Start) scheduled. Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 2 of 5 (Device Configure) complete. Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 3 of 5 (IP Configure Start) started... Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): device state change: config -> ip-config (reason 'none') [50 70 0] Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Beginning DHCPv4 transaction (timeout in 45 seconds) Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> dhclient started with pid 6212 Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 3 of 5 (IP Configure Start) complete. Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda dhclient: Internet Systems Consortium DHCP Client 4.2.4 Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda dhclient: Copyright 2004-2012 Internet Systems Consortium. Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda dhclient: All rights reserved. Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda dhclient: For info, please visit https://www.isc.org/software/dhcp/ Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda dhclient: Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): DHCPv4 state changed nbi -> preinit Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda dhclient: Listening on LPF/eth0/e8:40:f2:e2:4d:86 Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda dhclient: Sending on LPF/eth0/e8:40:f2:e2:4d:86 Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda dhclient: Sending on Socket/fallback Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda dhclient: DHCPREQUEST of 192.168.11.17 on eth0 to 255.255.255.255 port 67 Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda dhclient: DHCPACK of 192.168.11.17 from 192.168.11.1 Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): DHCPv4 state changed preinit -> reboot Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> address 192.168.11.17 Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> prefix 24 (255.255.255.0) Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> gateway 192.168.11.1 Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> hostname 'andromeda' Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> nameserver '192.168.11.1' Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> domain name 'hsd1.ca.comcast.net' Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 5 of 5 (IPv4 Configure Commit) scheduled... Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 5 of 5 (IPv4 Commit) started... Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: Joining mDNS multicast group on interface eth0.IPv4 with address 192.168.11.17. Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda dhclient: bound to 192.168.11.17 -- renewal in 35416 seconds. Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: New relevant interface eth0.IPv4 for mDNS. Dec 1 13:54:10 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: Registering new address record for 192.168.11.17 on eth0.IPv4. Dec 1 13:54:11 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> (eth0): device state change: ip-config -> activated (reason 'none') [70 100 0] Dec 1 13:54:11 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> ((null)): writing resolv.conf to /sbin/resolvconf Dec 1 13:54:11 andromeda dnsmasq[1907]: setting upstream servers from DBus Dec 1 13:54:11 andromeda dnsmasq[1907]: using nameserver 192.168.11.1#53 Dec 1 13:54:11 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Policy set '82579V' (eth0) as default for IPv4 routing and DNS. Dec 1 13:54:11 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) successful, device activated. Dec 1 13:54:11 andromeda NetworkManager[1115]: <info> Activation (eth0) Stage 5 of 5 (IPv4 Commit) complete. Dec 1 13:54:11 andromeda dbus[800]: [system] Activating service name='org.freedesktop.nm_dispatcher' (using servicehelper) Dec 1 13:54:11 andromeda dbus[800]: [system] Successfully activated service 'org.freedesktop.nm_dispatcher' Dec 1 13:54:12 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: Joining mDNS multicast group on interface eth0.IPv6 with address fe80::ea40:f2ff:fee2:4d86. Dec 1 13:54:12 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: New relevant interface eth0.IPv6 for mDNS. Dec 1 13:54:12 andromeda avahi-daemon[890]: Registering new address record for fe80::ea40:f2ff:fee2:4d86 on eth0.*. Dec 1 13:54:19 andromeda ntpdate[6286]: adjust time server 91.189.94.4 offset 0.001142 sec $ lspci -v 00:19.0 Ethernet controller: Intel Corporation 82579V Gigabit Network Connection (rev 04) Subsystem: Intel Corporation Device 2031 Flags: bus master, fast devsel, latency 0, IRQ 45 Memory at f7f00000 (32-bit, non-prefetchable) [size=128K] Memory at f7f39000 (32-bit, non-prefetchable) [size=4K] I/O ports at f040 [size=32] Capabilities: [c8] Power Management version 2 Capabilities: [d0] MSI: Enable+ Count=1/1 Maskable- 64bit+ Capabilities: [e0] PCI Advanced Features Kernel driver in use: e1000e Kernel modules: e1000e $ modinfo e1000e filename: /lib/modules/3.5.0-19-generic/kernel/drivers/net/e1000e/e1000e.ko version: 2.1.4-NAPI license: GPL description: Intel(R) PRO/1000 Network Driver author: Intel Corporation, <[email protected]> srcversion: 0809529BE0BBC44883956AF alias: pci:v00008086d0000153Bsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d0000153Asv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d00001503sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d00001502sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010F0sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010EFsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010EBsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010EAsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d00001525sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010DFsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010DEsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010CEsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010CDsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010CCsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010CBsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010F5sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010BFsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010E5sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d0000294Csv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010BDsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010C3sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010C2sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010C0sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d00001501sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d00001049sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d0000104Dsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d0000104Bsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d0000104Asv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010C4sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010C5sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d0000104Csv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010BBsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d00001098sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010BAsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d00001096sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d0000150Csv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010F6sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010D3sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d0000109Asv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d0000108Csv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d0000108Bsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d0000107Fsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d0000107Esv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d0000107Dsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010B9sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010D5sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010DAsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010D9sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d00001060sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010A5sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010BCsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d000010A4sv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d0000105Fsv*sd*bc*sc*i* alias: pci:v00008086d0000105Esv*sd*bc*sc*i* depends: vermagic: 3.5.0-19-generic SMP mod_unload modversions parm: copybreak:Maximum size of packet that is copied to a new buffer on receive (uint) parm: TxIntDelay:Transmit Interrupt Delay (array of int) parm: TxAbsIntDelay:Transmit Absolute Interrupt Delay (array of int) parm: RxIntDelay:Receive Interrupt Delay (array of int) parm: RxAbsIntDelay:Receive Absolute Interrupt Delay (array of int) parm: InterruptThrottleRate:Interrupt Throttling Rate (array of int) parm: IntMode:Interrupt Mode (array of int) parm: SmartPowerDownEnable:Enable PHY smart power down (array of int) parm: KumeranLockLoss:Enable Kumeran lock loss workaround (array of int) parm: CrcStripping:Enable CRC Stripping, disable if your BMC needs the CRC (array of int) parm: EEE:Enable/disable on parts that support the feature (array of int) parm: Node:[ROUTING] Node to allocate memory on, default -1 (array of int) parm: debug:Debug level (0=none,...,16=all) (int)

    Read the article

  • PC hangs and reboots from time to time

    - by Bevor
    Hello, I have a very strange problem: Since I have my new PC, I have always had problems with it. From time to time the computer freezes for some seconds and suddendly reboots by itself. I've had this problem since Ubuntu 9.10. The same with 10.04 and 10.10. That's why I don't think it's a software failure because the problem persist too long. It doesn't have anything to do with what I'm doing at this time. Sometimes I listen to music, sometimes I only use Firefox, sometimes I'm running 2 or 3 VMs, sometimes I watch DVD. So it's not isolatable. I could freeze once a day or once a week. I put the PC to the vendor twice(!). The first time they changed my power supply but the problem persisted. The second time they told me that they made some heavy performance tests 50 hours long but they didn't find anything. (How can that be that I have daily freezes with normal usage). The vendor didn't check the hard discs because they used their own disc with Windows. (So they never checked the Linux installation). Yesterday I made some intensive hard disc scans with "SMART" but no errors were found. I ran memtest for 3 times but no errors found. I already had this problem in my old flat, so I doubt that I has something to do with current fluctuation. I already tried another electrical socket and changed to connector strip but the problem persists. At the moment I removed 2 of the RAMs (2x 2GB). In all I have 6GB, 2x2GB and 2x1GB. Could this difference maybe be a problem? Here is a list of my components. I hope that anybody find something I didn't think about yet. And here a list of my components: 1x AMD Phenom II X4 965 Black Edition, 3,4Ghz, Quad Core, S-AM3, Boxed 2x DDR3-RAM 2048MB, PC3-1333 Mhz, CL9, Kingston ValueRAM 2x DDR3-RAM 1024MB, PC3-1333 Mhz, CL9, Kingston ValueRAM 2x SATA II Seagate Barracuda 7200.12, 1TB 32MB Cache = RAID 1 1x DVD ROM SATA LG DH16NSR, 16x/52x 1x DVD-+R/-+RW SATA LG GH-22NS50 1x Cardreader 18in1 1x PCI-E 2.0 GeForce GTS 250, Retail, 1024MB 1x Power Supply ATX 400 Watt, CHIEFTEC APS-400S, 80 Plus 1x Network card PCI Intel PRO/1000GT 10/100/1000 MBit 1x Mainboard Socket-AM3 ASUS M4A79XTD EVO, ATX lshw: description: Desktop Computer product: System Product Name vendor: System manufacturer version: System Version serial: System Serial Number width: 64 bits capabilities: smbios-2.5 dmi-2.5 vsyscall64 vsyscall32 configuration: boot=normal chassis=desktop uuid=80E4001E-8C00-002C-AA59-E0CB4EBAC29A *-core description: Motherboard product: M4A79XTD EVO vendor: ASUSTeK Computer INC. physical id: 0 version: Rev X.0X serial: MT709CK11101196 slot: To Be Filled By O.E.M. *-firmware description: BIOS vendor: American Megatrends Inc. physical id: 0 version: 0704 (11/25/2009) size: 64KiB capacity: 960KiB capabilities: isa pci pnp apm upgrade shadowing escd cdboot bootselect socketedrom edd int13floppy1200 int13floppy720 int13floppy2880 int5printscreen int9keyboard int14serial int17printer int10video acpi usb ls120boot zipboot biosbootspecification *-cpu description: CPU product: AMD Phenom(tm) II X4 965 Processor vendor: Advanced Micro Devices [AMD] physical id: 4 bus info: cpu@0 version: AMD Phenom(tm) II X4 965 Processor serial: To Be Filled By O.E.M. slot: AM3 size: 800MHz capacity: 3400MHz width: 64 bits clock: 200MHz capabilities: fpu fpu_exception wp vme de pse tsc msr pae mce cx8 apic sep mtrr pge mca cmov pat pse36 clflush mmx fxsr sse sse2 ht syscall nx mmxext fxsr_opt pdpe1gb rdtscp x86-64 3dnowext 3dnow constant_tsc rep_good nonstop_tsc extd_apicid pni monitor cx16 popcnt lahf_lm cmp_legacy svm extapic cr8_legacy abm sse4a misalignsse 3dnowprefetch osvw ibs skinit wdt npt lbrv svm_lock nrip_save cpufreq *-cache:0 description: L1 cache physical id: 5 slot: L1-Cache size: 512KiB capacity: 512KiB capabilities: pipeline-burst internal varies data *-cache:1 description: L2 cache physical id: 6 slot: L2-Cache size: 2MiB capacity: 2MiB capabilities: pipeline-burst internal varies unified *-cache:2 description: L3 cache physical id: 7 slot: L3-Cache size: 6MiB capacity: 6MiB capabilities: pipeline-burst internal varies unified *-memory description: System Memory physical id: 36 slot: System board or motherboard size: 2GiB *-bank:0 description: DIMM Synchronous 1333 MHz (0.8 ns) product: ModulePartNumber00 vendor: Manufacturer00 physical id: 0 serial: SerNum00 slot: DIMM0 size: 1GiB width: 64 bits clock: 1333MHz (0.8ns) *-bank:1 description: DIMM Synchronous 1333 MHz (0.8 ns) product: ModulePartNumber01 vendor: Manufacturer01 physical id: 1 serial: SerNum01 slot: DIMM1 size: 1GiB width: 64 bits clock: 1333MHz (0.8ns) *-bank:2 description: DIMM [empty] product: ModulePartNumber02 vendor: Manufacturer02 physical id: 2 serial: SerNum02 slot: DIMM2 *-bank:3 description: DIMM [empty] product: ModulePartNumber03 vendor: Manufacturer03 physical id: 3 serial: SerNum03 slot: DIMM3 *-pci:0 description: Host bridge product: RD780 Northbridge only dual slot PCI-e_GFX and HT1 K8 part vendor: ATI Technologies Inc physical id: 100 bus info: pci@0000:00:00.0 version: 00 width: 32 bits clock: 66MHz *-pci:0 description: PCI bridge product: RD790 PCI to PCI bridge (external gfx0 port A) vendor: ATI Technologies Inc physical id: 2 bus info: pci@0000:00:02.0 version: 00 width: 32 bits clock: 33MHz capabilities: pci pm pciexpress msi ht normal_decode bus_master cap_list configuration: driver=pcieport resources: irq:40 ioport:a000(size=4096) memory:f8000000-fbbfffff ioport:d0000000(size=268435456) *-display description: VGA compatible controller product: G92 [GeForce GTS 250] vendor: nVidia Corporation physical id: 0 bus info: pci@0000:01:00.0 version: a2 width: 64 bits clock: 33MHz capabilities: pm msi pciexpress vga_controller bus_master cap_list rom configuration: driver=nvidia latency=0 resources: irq:18 memory:fa000000-faffffff memory:d0000000-dfffffff memory:f8000000-f9ffffff ioport:ac00(size=128) memory:fbbe0000-fbbfffff *-pci:1 description: PCI bridge product: RD790 PCI to PCI bridge (PCI express gpp port C) vendor: ATI Technologies Inc physical id: 6 bus info: pci@0000:00:06.0 version: 00 width: 32 bits clock: 33MHz capabilities: pci pm pciexpress msi ht normal_decode bus_master cap_list configuration: driver=pcieport resources: irq:41 ioport:b000(size=4096) memory:fbc00000-fbcfffff ioport:f6f00000(size=1048576) *-network description: Ethernet interface product: RTL8111/8168B PCI Express Gigabit Ethernet controller vendor: Realtek Semiconductor Co., Ltd. physical id: 0 bus info: pci@0000:02:00.0 logical name: eth0 version: 03 serial: e0:cb:4e:ba:c2:9a size: 10MB/s capacity: 1GB/s width: 64 bits clock: 33MHz capabilities: pm msi pciexpress msix vpd bus_master cap_list rom ethernet physical tp mii 10bt 10bt-fd 100bt 100bt-fd 1000bt 1000bt-fd autonegotiation configuration: autonegotiation=on broadcast=yes driver=r8169 driverversion=2.3LK-NAPI duplex=half latency=0 link=no multicast=yes port=MII speed=10MB/s resources: irq:45 ioport:b800(size=256) memory:f6fff000-f6ffffff memory:f6ff8000-f6ffbfff memory:fbcf0000-fbcfffff *-pci:2 description: PCI bridge product: RD790 PCI to PCI bridge (PCI express gpp port D) vendor: ATI Technologies Inc physical id: 7 bus info: pci@0000:00:07.0 version: 00 width: 32 bits clock: 33MHz capabilities: pci pm pciexpress msi ht normal_decode bus_master cap_list configuration: driver=pcieport resources: irq:42 ioport:c000(size=4096) memory:fbd00000-fbdfffff *-firewire description: FireWire (IEEE 1394) product: VT6315 Series Firewire Controller vendor: VIA Technologies, Inc. physical id: 0 bus info: pci@0000:03:00.0 version: 00 width: 64 bits clock: 33MHz capabilities: pm msi pciexpress ohci bus_master cap_list configuration: driver=firewire_ohci latency=0 resources: irq:19 memory:fbdff800-fbdfffff ioport:c800(size=256) *-pci:3 description: PCI bridge product: RD790 PCI to PCI bridge (PCI express gpp port E) vendor: ATI Technologies Inc physical id: 9 bus info: pci@0000:00:09.0 version: 00 width: 32 bits clock: 33MHz capabilities: pci pm pciexpress msi ht normal_decode bus_master cap_list configuration: driver=pcieport resources: irq:43 ioport:d000(size=4096) memory:fbe00000-fbefffff *-ide description: IDE interface product: 88SE6121 SATA II Controller vendor: Marvell Technology Group Ltd. physical id: 0 bus info: pci@0000:04:00.0 version: b2 width: 32 bits clock: 33MHz capabilities: ide pm msi pciexpress bus_master cap_list configuration: driver=pata_marvell latency=0 resources: irq:17 ioport:dc00(size=8) ioport:d880(size=4) ioport:d800(size=8) ioport:d480(size=4) ioport:d400(size=16) memory:fbeffc00-fbefffff *-storage description: SATA controller product: SB700/SB800 SATA Controller [IDE mode] vendor: ATI Technologies Inc physical id: 11 bus info: pci@0000:00:11.0 logical name: scsi0 logical name: scsi2 version: 00 width: 32 bits clock: 66MHz capabilities: storage msi ahci_1.0 bus_master cap_list emulated configuration: driver=ahci latency=64 resources: irq:44 ioport:9000(size=8) ioport:8000(size=4) ioport:7000(size=8) ioport:6000(size=4) ioport:5000(size=16) memory:f7fffc00-f7ffffff *-disk:0 description: ATA Disk product: ST31000528AS vendor: Seagate physical id: 0 bus info: scsi@0:0.0.0 logical name: /dev/sda version: CC38 serial: 9VP3WD9Z size: 931GiB (1TB) capabilities: partitioned partitioned:dos configuration: ansiversion=5 signature=000ad206 *-volume:0 UNCLAIMED description: Linux filesystem partition vendor: Linux physical id: 1 bus info: scsi@0:0.0.0,1 version: 1.0 serial: 81839235-21ea-4853-90a4-814779f49000 size: 972MiB capacity: 972MiB capabilities: primary ext2 initialized configuration: filesystem=ext2 modified=2010-12-06 18:32:58 mounted=2010-11-01 07:05:10 state=unknown *-volume:1 UNCLAIMED description: Linux swap volume physical id: 2 bus info: scsi@0:0.0.0,2 version: 1 serial: 22b881d5-6f5c-484d-94e8-e231896fa91b size: 486MiB capacity: 486MiB capabilities: primary nofs swap initialized configuration: filesystem=swap pagesize=4096 *-volume:2 UNCLAIMED description: EXT3 volume vendor: Linux physical id: 3 bus info: scsi@0:0.0.0,3 version: 1.0 serial: ad5b0daf-11e8-4f8f-8598-4e89da9c0d84 size: 47GiB capacity: 47GiB capabilities: primary journaled extended_attributes large_files recover ext3 ext2 initialized configuration: created=2010-02-16 20:42:29 filesystem=ext3 modified=2010-11-29 17:02:34 mounted=2010-12-06 18:32:50 state=clean *-volume:3 UNCLAIMED description: Extended partition physical id: 4 bus info: scsi@0:0.0.0,4 size: 882GiB capacity: 882GiB capabilities: primary extended partitioned partitioned:extended *-logicalvolume UNCLAIMED description: Linux filesystem partition physical id: 5 capacity: 882GiB *-disk:1 description: ATA Disk product: ST31000528AS vendor: Seagate physical id: 1 bus info: scsi@2:0.0.0 logical name: /dev/sdb version: CC38 serial: 9VP3SCPF size: 931GiB (1TB) capabilities: partitioned partitioned:dos configuration: ansiversion=5 signature=000ad206 *-volume:0 UNCLAIMED description: Linux filesystem partition vendor: Linux physical id: 1 bus info: scsi@2:0.0.0,1 version: 1.0 serial: 81839235-21ea-4853-90a4-814779f49000 size: 972MiB capacity: 972MiB capabilities: primary ext2 initialized configuration: filesystem=ext2 modified=2010-12-06 18:32:58 mounted=2010-11-01 07:05:10 state=unknown *-volume:1 UNCLAIMED description: Linux swap volume physical id: 2 bus info: scsi@2:0.0.0,2 version: 1 serial: 22b881d5-6f5c-484d-94e8-e231896fa91b size: 486MiB capacity: 486MiB capabilities: primary nofs swap initialized configuration: filesystem=swap pagesize=4096 *-volume:2 UNCLAIMED description: EXT3 volume vendor: Linux physical id: 3 bus info: scsi@2:0.0.0,3 version: 1.0 serial: ad5b0daf-11e8-4f8f-8598-4e89da9c0d84 size: 47GiB capacity: 47GiB capabilities: primary journaled extended_attributes large_files recover ext3 ext2 initialized configuration: created=2010-02-16 20:42:29 filesystem=ext3 modified=2010-11-29 17:02:34 mounted=2010-12-06 18:32:50 state=clean *-volume:3 UNCLAIMED description: Extended partition physical id: 4 bus info: scsi@2:0.0.0,4 size: 882GiB capacity: 882GiB capabilities: primary extended partitioned partitioned:extended *-logicalvolume UNCLAIMED description: Linux filesystem partition physical id: 5 capacity: 882GiB *-usb:0 description: USB Controller product: SB700/SB800 USB OHCI0 Controller vendor: ATI Technologies Inc physical id: 12 bus info: pci@0000:00:12.0 version: 00 width: 32 bits clock: 66MHz capabilities: ohci bus_master configuration: driver=ohci_hcd latency=64 resources: irq:16 memory:f7ffd000-f7ffdfff *-usb:1 description: USB Controller product: SB700 USB OHCI1 Controller vendor: ATI Technologies Inc physical id: 12.1 bus info: pci@0000:00:12.1 version: 00 width: 32 bits clock: 66MHz capabilities: ohci bus_master configuration: driver=ohci_hcd latency=64 resources: irq:16 memory:f7ffe000-f7ffefff *-usb:2 description: USB Controller product: SB700/SB800 USB EHCI Controller vendor: ATI Technologies Inc physical id: 12.2 bus info: pci@0000:00:12.2 version: 00 width: 32 bits clock: 66MHz capabilities: pm debug ehci bus_master cap_list configuration: driver=ehci_hcd latency=64 resources: irq:17 memory:f7fff800-f7fff8ff *-usb:3 description: USB Controller product: SB700/SB800 USB OHCI0 Controller vendor: ATI Technologies Inc physical id: 13 bus info: pci@0000:00:13.0 version: 00 width: 32 bits clock: 66MHz capabilities: ohci bus_master configuration: driver=ohci_hcd latency=64 resources: irq:18 memory:f7ffb000-f7ffbfff *-usb:4 description: USB Controller product: SB700 USB OHCI1 Controller vendor: ATI Technologies Inc physical id: 13.1 bus info: pci@0000:00:13.1 version: 00 width: 32 bits clock: 66MHz capabilities: ohci bus_master configuration: driver=ohci_hcd latency=64 resources: irq:18 memory:f7ffc000-f7ffcfff *-usb:5 description: USB Controller product: SB700/SB800 USB EHCI Controller vendor: ATI Technologies Inc physical id: 13.2 bus info: pci@0000:00:13.2 version: 00 width: 32 bits clock: 66MHz capabilities: pm debug ehci bus_master cap_list configuration: driver=ehci_hcd latency=64 resources: irq:19 memory:f7fff400-f7fff4ff *-serial UNCLAIMED description: SMBus product: SBx00 SMBus Controller vendor: ATI Technologies Inc physical id: 14 bus info: pci@0000:00:14.0 version: 3c width: 32 bits clock: 66MHz capabilities: ht cap_list configuration: latency=0 *-ide description: IDE interface product: SB700/SB800 IDE Controller vendor: ATI Technologies Inc physical id: 14.1 bus info: pci@0000:00:14.1 logical name: scsi5 version: 00 width: 32 bits clock: 66MHz capabilities: ide msi bus_master cap_list emulated configuration: driver=pata_atiixp latency=64 resources: irq:16 ioport:1f0(size=8) ioport:3f6 ioport:170(size=8) ioport:376 ioport:ff00(size=16) *-cdrom:0 description: DVD reader product: DVDROM DH16NS30 vendor: HL-DT-ST physical id: 0.0.0 bus info: scsi@5:0.0.0 logical name: /dev/cdrom1 logical name: /dev/dvd1 logical name: /dev/scd0 logical name: /dev/sr0 version: 1.00 capabilities: removable audio dvd configuration: ansiversion=5 status=nodisc *-cdrom:1 description: DVD-RAM writer product: DVDRAM GH22NS50 vendor: HL-DT-ST physical id: 0.1.0 bus info: scsi@5:0.1.0 logical name: /dev/cdrom logical name: /dev/cdrw logical name: /dev/dvd logical name: /dev/dvdrw logical name: /dev/scd1 logical name: /dev/sr1 version: TN02 capabilities: removable audio cd-r cd-rw dvd dvd-r dvd-ram configuration: ansiversion=5 status=nodisc *-multimedia description: Audio device product: SBx00 Azalia (Intel HDA) vendor: ATI Technologies Inc physical id: 14.2 bus info: pci@0000:00:14.2 version: 00 width: 64 bits clock: 33MHz capabilities: pm bus_master cap_list configuration: driver=HDA Intel latency=64 resources: irq:16 memory:f7ff4000-f7ff7fff *-isa description: ISA bridge product: SB700/SB800 LPC host controller vendor: ATI Technologies Inc physical id: 14.3 bus info: pci@0000:00:14.3 version: 00 width: 32 bits clock: 66MHz capabilities: isa bus_master configuration: latency=0 *-pci:4 description: PCI bridge product: SBx00 PCI to PCI Bridge vendor: ATI Technologies Inc physical id: 14.4 bus info: pci@0000:00:14.4 version: 00 width: 32 bits clock: 66MHz capabilities: pci subtractive_decode bus_master resources: ioport:e000(size=4096) memory:fbf00000-fbffffff *-network description: Ethernet interface product: 82541PI Gigabit Ethernet Controller vendor: Intel Corporation physical id: 5 bus info: pci@0000:05:05.0 logical name: eth1 version: 05 serial: 00:1b:21:56:f3:60 size: 100MB/s capacity: 1GB/s width: 32 bits clock: 66MHz capabilities: pm pcix bus_master cap_list rom ethernet physical tp 10bt 10bt-fd 100bt 100bt-fd 1000bt-fd autonegotiation configuration: autonegotiation=on broadcast=yes driver=e1000 driverversion=7.3.21-k6-NAPI duplex=full firmware=N/A ip=192.168.1.2 latency=64 link=yes mingnt=255 multicast=yes port=twisted pair speed=100MB/s resources: irq:20 memory:fbfe0000-fbffffff memory:fbfc0000-fbfdffff ioport:ec00(size=64) memory:fbfa0000-fbfbffff *-usb:6 description: USB Controller product: SB700/SB800 USB OHCI2 Controller vendor: ATI Technologies Inc physical id: 14.5 bus info: pci@0000:00:14.5 version: 00 width: 32 bits clock: 66MHz capabilities: ohci bus_master configuration: driver=ohci_hcd latency=64 resources: irq:18 memory:f7ffa000-f7ffafff *-pci:1 description: Host bridge product: Family 10h Processor HyperTransport Configuration vendor: Advanced Micro Devices [AMD] physical id: 101 bus info: pci@0000:00:18.0 version: 00 width: 32 bits clock: 33MHz *-pci:2 description: Host bridge product: Family 10h Processor Address Map vendor: Advanced Micro Devices [AMD] physical id: 102 bus info: pci@0000:00:18.1 version: 00 width: 32 bits clock: 33MHz *-pci:3 description: Host bridge product: Family 10h Processor DRAM Controller vendor: Advanced Micro Devices [AMD] physical id: 103 bus info: pci@0000:00:18.2 version: 00 width: 32 bits clock: 33MHz *-pci:4 description: Host bridge product: Family 10h Processor Miscellaneous Control vendor: Advanced Micro Devices [AMD] physical id: 104 bus info: pci@0000:00:18.3 version: 00 width: 32 bits clock: 33MHz configuration: driver=k10temp resources: irq:0 *-pci:5 description: Host bridge product: Family 10h Processor Link Control vendor: Advanced Micro Devices [AMD] physical id: 105 bus info: pci@0000:00:18.4 version: 00 width: 32 bits clock: 33MHz *-scsi physical id: 1 bus info: usb@2:3 logical name: scsi8 capabilities: emulated scsi-host configuration: driver=usb-storage *-disk:0 description: SCSI Disk physical id: 0.0.0 bus info: scsi@8:0.0.0 logical name: /dev/sdc *-disk:1 description: SCSI Disk physical id: 0.0.1 bus info: scsi@8:0.0.1 logical name: /dev/sdd *-disk:2 description: SCSI Disk physical id: 0.0.2 bus info: scsi@8:0.0.2 logical name: /dev/sde *-disk:3 description: SCSI Disk physical id: 0.0.3 bus info: scsi@8:0.0.3 logical name: /dev/sdf *-network DISABLED description: Ethernet interface physical id: 1 logical name: vboxnet0 serial: 0a:00:27:00:00:00 capabilities: ethernet physical configuration: broadcast=yes multicast=yes

    Read the article

  • Azure WNS to Win8 - Push Notifications for Metro Apps

    - by JoshReuben
    Background The Windows Azure Toolkit for Windows 8 allows you to build a Windows Azure Cloud Service that can send Push Notifications to registered Metro apps via Windows Notification Service (WNS). Some configuration is required - you need to: Register the Metro app for Windows Live Application Management Provide Package SID & Client Secret to WNS Modify the Azure Cloud App cscfg file and the Metro app package.appxmanifest file to contain matching Metro package name, SID and client secret. The Mechanism: These notifications take the form of XAML Tile, Toast, Raw or Badge UI notifications. The core engine is provided via the WNS nuget recipe, which exposes an API for constructing payloads and posting notifications to WNS. An application receives push notifications by requesting a notification channel from WNS, which returns a channel URI that the application then registers with a cloud service. In the cloud service, A WnsAccessTokenProvider authenticates with WNS by providing its credentials, the package SID and secret key, and receives in return an access token that the provider caches and can reuse for multiple notification requests. The cloud service constructs a notification request by filling out a template class that contains the information that will be sent with the notification, including text and image references. Using the channel URI of a registered client, the cloud service can then send a notification whenever it has an update for the user. The package contains the NotificationSendUtils class for submitting notifications. The Windows Azure Toolkit for Windows 8 (WAT) provides the PNWorker sample pair of solutions - The Azure server side contains a WebRole & a WorkerRole. The WebRole allows submission of new push notifications into an Azure Queue which the WorkerRole extracts and processes. Further background resources: http://watwindows8.codeplex.com/ - Windows Azure Toolkit for Windows 8 http://watwindows8.codeplex.com/wikipage?title=Push%20Notification%20Worker%20Sample - WAT WNS sample setup http://watwindows8.codeplex.com/wikipage?title=Using%20the%20Windows%208%20Cloud%20Application%20Services%20Application – using Windows 8 with Cloud Application Services A bit of Configuration Register the Metro apps for Windows Live Application Management From the current app manifest of your metro app Publish tab, copy the Package Display Name and the Publisher From: https://manage.dev.live.com/Build/ Package name: <-- we need to change this Client secret: keep this Package Security Identifier (SID): keep this Verify the app here: https://manage.dev.live.com/Applications/Index - so this step is done "If you wish to send push notifications in your application, provide your Package Security Identifier (SID) and client secret to WNS." Provide Package SID & Client Secret to WNS http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windows/apps/hh465407.aspx - How to authenticate with WNS https://appdev.microsoft.com/StorePortals/en-us/Account/Signup/PurchaseSubscription - register app with dashboard - need registration code or register a new account & pay $170 shekels http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windows/apps/hh868184.aspx - Registering for a Windows Store developer account http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windows/apps/hh868187.aspx - Picking a Microsoft account for the Windows Store The WNS Nuget Recipe The WNS Recipe is a nuget package that provides an API for authenticating against WNS, constructing payloads and posting notifications to WNS. After installing this package, a WnsRecipe assembly is added to project references. To send notifications using WNS, first register the application at the Windows Push Notifications & Live Connect portal to obtain Package Security Identifier (SID) and a secret key that your cloud service uses to authenticate with WNS. An application receives push notifications by requesting a notification channel from WNS, which returns a channel URI that the application then registers with a cloud service. In the cloud service, the WnsAccessTokenProvider authenticates with WNS by providing its credentials, the package SID and secret key, and receives in return an access token that the provider caches and can reuse for multiple notification requests. The cloud service constructs a notification request by filling out a template class that contains the information that will be sent with the notification, including text and image references.Using the channel URI of a registered client, the cloud service can then send a notification whenever it has an update for the user. var provider = new WnsAccessTokenProvider(clientId, clientSecret); var notification = new ToastNotification(provider) {     ToastType = ToastType.ToastText02,     Text = new List<string> { "blah"} }; notification.Send(channelUri); the WNS Recipe is instrumented to write trace information via a trace listener – configuratively or programmatically from Application_Start(): WnsDiagnostics.Enable(); WnsDiagnostics.TraceSource.Listeners.Add(new DiagnosticMonitorTraceListener()); WnsDiagnostics.TraceSource.Switch.Level = SourceLevels.Verbose; The WAT PNWorker Sample The Azure server side contains a WebRole & a WorkerRole. The WebRole allows submission of new push notifications into an Azure Queue which the WorkerRole extracts and processes. Overview of Push Notification Worker Sample The toolkit includes a sample application based on the same solution structure as the one created by theWindows 8 Cloud Application Services project template. The sample demonstrates how to off-load the job of sending Windows Push Notifications using a Windows Azure worker role. You can find the source code in theSamples\PNWorker folder. This folder contains a full version of the sample application showing how to use Windows Push Notifications using ASP.NET Membership as the authentication mechanism. The sample contains two different solution files: WATWindows.Azure.sln: This solution must be opened with Visual Studio 2010 and contains the projects related to the Windows Azure web and worker roles. WATWindows.Client.sln: This solution must be opened with Visual Studio 11 and contains the Windows Metro style application project. Only Visual Studio 2010 supports Windows Azure cloud projects so you currently need to use this edition to launch the server application. This will change in a future release of the Windows Azure tools when support for Visual Studio 11 is enabled. Important: Setting up the PNWorker Sample Before running the PNWorker sample, you need to register the application and configure it: 1. Register the app: To register your application, go to the Windows Live Application Management site for Metro style apps at https://manage.dev.live.com/build and sign in with your Windows Live ID. In the Windows Push Notifications & Live Connect page, enter the following information. Package Display Name PNWorker.Sample Publisher CN=127.0.0.1, O=TESTING ONLY, OU=Windows Azure DevFabric 2. 3. Once you register the application, make a note of the values shown in the portal for Client Secret,Package Name and Package SID. 4. Configure the app - double-click the SetupSample.cmd file located inside the Samples\PNWorker folder to launch a tool that will guide you through the process of configuring the sample. setup runs a PowerShell script that requires running with administration privileges to allow the scripts to execute in your machine. When prompted, enter the Client Secret, Package Name, and Package Security Identifier you obtained previously and wait until the tool finishes configuring your sample. Running the PNWorker Sample To run this sample, you must run both the client and the server application projects. 1. Open Visual Studio 2010 as an administrator. Open the WATWindows.Azure.sln solution. Set the start-up project of the solution as the cloud project. Run the app in the dev fabric to test. 2. Open Visual Studio 11 and open the WATWindows.Client.sln solution. Run the Metro client application. In the client application, click Reopen channel and send to server. à the application opens the channel and registers it with the cloud application, & the Output area shows the channel URI. 3. Refresh the WebRole's Push Notifications page to see the UI list the newly registered client. 4. Send notifications to the client application by clicking the Send Notification button. Setup 3 command files + 1 powershell script: SetupSample.cmd –> SetupWPNS.vbs –> SetupWPNS.cmd –> SetupWPNS.UpdateWPNSCredentialsInServiceConfiguration.ps1 appears to set PackageName – from manifest Client Id package security id (SID) – from registration Client Secret – from registration The following configs are modified: WATWindows\ServiceConfiguration.Cloud.cscfg WATWindows\ServiceConfiguration.Local.cscfg WATWindows.Client\package.appxmanifest WatWindows.Notifications A class library – it references the following WNS DLL: C:\WorkDev\CountdownValue\AzureToolkits\WATWindows8\Samples\PNWorker\packages\WnsRecipe.0.0.3.0\lib\net40\WnsRecipe.dll NotificationJobRequest A DataContract for triggering notifications:     using System.Runtime.Serialization; using Microsoft.Windows.Samples.Notifications;     [DataContract]     [KnownType(typeof(WnsAccessTokenProvider))] public class NotificationJobRequest     {               [DataMember] public bool ProcessAsync { get; set; }          [DataMember] public string Payload { get; set; }         [DataMember] public string ChannelUrl { get; set; }         [DataMember] public NotificationType NotificationType { get; set; }         [DataMember] public IAccessTokenProvider AccessTokenProvider { get; set; }         [DataMember] public NotificationSendOptions NotificationSendOptions{ get; set; }     } Investigated these types: WnsAccessTokenProvider – a DataContract that contains the client Id and client secret NotificationType – an enum that can be: Tile, Toast, badge, Raw IAccessTokenProvider – get or reset the access token NotificationSendOptions – SecondsTTL, NotificationPriority (enum), isCache, isRequestForStatus, Tag   There is also a NotificationJobSerializer class which basically wraps a DataContractSerializer serialization / deserialization of NotificationJobRequest The WNSNotificationJobProcessor class This class wraps the NotificationSendUtils API – it periodically extracts any NotificationJobRequest objects from a CloudQueue and submits them to WNS. The ProcessJobMessageRequest method – this is the punchline: it will deserialize a CloudQueueMessage into a NotificationJobRequest & send pass its contents to NotificationUtils to SendAsynchronously / SendSynchronously, (and then dequeue the message).     public override void ProcessJobMessageRequest(CloudQueueMessage notificationJobMessageRequest)         { Trace.WriteLine("Processing a new Notification Job Request", "Information"); NotificationJobRequest pushNotificationJob =                 NotificationJobSerializer.Deserialize(notificationJobMessageRequest.AsString); if (pushNotificationJob != null)             { if (pushNotificationJob.ProcessAsync)                 { Trace.WriteLine("Sending the notification asynchronously", "Information"); NotificationSendUtils.SendAsynchronously( new Uri(pushNotificationJob.ChannelUrl),                         pushNotificationJob.AccessTokenProvider,                         pushNotificationJob.Payload,                         result => this.ProcessSendResult(pushNotificationJob, result),                         result => this.ProcessSendResultError(pushNotificationJob, result),                         pushNotificationJob.NotificationType,                         pushNotificationJob.NotificationSendOptions);                 } else                 { Trace.WriteLine("Sending the notification synchronously", "Information"); NotificationSendResult result = NotificationSendUtils.Send( new Uri(pushNotificationJob.ChannelUrl),                         pushNotificationJob.AccessTokenProvider,                         pushNotificationJob.Payload,                         pushNotificationJob.NotificationType,                         pushNotificationJob.NotificationSendOptions); this.ProcessSendResult(pushNotificationJob, result);                 }             } else             { Trace.WriteLine("Could not deserialize the notification job", "Error");             } this.queue.DeleteMessage(notificationJobMessageRequest);         } Investigation of NotificationSendUtils class - This is the engine – it exposes Send and a SendAsyncronously overloads that take the following params from the NotificationJobRequest: Channel Uri AccessTokenProvider Payload NotificationType NotificationSendOptions WebRole WebRole is a large MVC project – it references WatWindows.Notifications as well as the following WNS DLL: \AzureToolkits\WATWindows8\Samples\PNWorker\packages\WnsRecipe.0.0.3.0\lib\net40\NotificationsExtensions.dll Controllers\PushNotificationController.cs Notification related namespaces:     using Notifications;     using NotificationsExtensions;     using NotificationsExtensions.BadgeContent;     using NotificationsExtensions.RawContent;     using NotificationsExtensions.TileContent;     using NotificationsExtensions.ToastContent;     using Windows.Samples.Notifications; TokenProvider – initialized from the Azure RoleEnvironment:   IAccessTokenProvider tokenProvider = new WnsAccessTokenProvider(         RoleEnvironment.GetConfigurationSettingValue("WNSPackageSID"),         RoleEnvironment.GetConfigurationSettingValue("WNSClientSecret")); SendNotification method – calls QueuePushMessage method to create and serialize a NotificationJobRequest and enqueue it in a CloudQueue [HttpPost]         public ActionResult SendNotification(             [ModelBinder(typeof(NotificationTemplateModelBinder))] INotificationContent notification,             string channelUrl,             NotificationPriority priority = NotificationPriority.Normal)         {             var payload = notification.GetContent();             var options = new NotificationSendOptions()             {                 Priority = priority             };             var notificationType =                 notification is IBadgeNotificationContent ? NotificationType.Badge :                 notification is IRawNotificationContent ? NotificationType.Raw :                 notification is ITileNotificationContent ? NotificationType.Tile :                 NotificationType.Toast;             this.QueuePushMessage(payload, channelUrl, notificationType, options);             object response = new             {                 Status = "Queued for delivery to WNS"             };             return this.Json(response);         } GetSendTemplate method: Create the cshtml partial rendering based on the notification type     [HttpPost]         public ActionResult GetSendTemplate(NotificationTemplateViewModel templateOptions)         {             PartialViewResult result = null;             switch (templateOptions.NotificationType)             {                 case "Badge":                     templateOptions.BadgeGlyphValueContent = Enum.GetNames(typeof( GlyphValue));                     ViewBag.ViewData = templateOptions;                     result = PartialView("_" + templateOptions.NotificationTemplateType);                     break;                 case "Raw":                     ViewBag.ViewData = templateOptions;                     result = PartialView("_Raw");                     break;                 case "Toast":                     templateOptions.TileImages = this.blobClient.GetAllBlobsInContainer(ConfigReader.GetConfigValue("TileImagesContainer")).OrderBy(i => i.FileName).ToList();                     templateOptions.ToastAudioContent = Enum.GetNames(typeof( ToastAudioContent));                     templateOptions.Priorities = Enum.GetNames(typeof( NotificationPriority));                     ViewBag.ViewData = templateOptions;                     result = PartialView("_" + templateOptions.NotificationTemplateType);                     break;                 case "Tile":                     templateOptions.TileImages = this.blobClient.GetAllBlobsInContainer(ConfigReader.GetConfigValue("TileImagesContainer")).OrderBy(i => i.FileName).ToList();                     ViewBag.ViewData = templateOptions;                     result = PartialView("_" + templateOptions.NotificationTemplateType);                     break;             }             return result;         } Investigated these types: ToastAudioContent – an enum of different Win8 sound effects for toast notifications GlyphValue – an enum of different Win8 icons for badge notifications · Infrastructure\NotificationTemplateModelBinder.cs WNS Namespace references     using NotificationsExtensions.BadgeContent;     using NotificationsExtensions.RawContent;     using NotificationsExtensions.TileContent;     using NotificationsExtensions.ToastContent; Various NotificationFactory derived types can server as bindable models in MVC for creating INotificationContent types. Default values are also set for IWideTileNotificationContent & IToastNotificationContent. Type factoryType = null;             switch (notificationType)             {                 case "Badge":                     factoryType = typeof(BadgeContentFactory);                     break;                 case "Tile":                     factoryType = typeof(TileContentFactory);                     break;                 case "Toast":                     factoryType = typeof(ToastContentFactory);                     break;                 case "Raw":                     factoryType = typeof(RawContentFactory);                     break;             } Investigated these types: BadgeContentFactory – CreateBadgeGlyph, CreateBadgeNumeric (???) TileContentFactory – many notification content creation methods , apparently one for every tile layout type ToastContentFactory – many notification content creation methods , apparently one for every toast layout type RawContentFactory – passing strings WorkerRole WNS Namespace references using Notifications; using Notifications.WNS; using Windows.Samples.Notifications; OnStart() Method – on Worker Role startup, initialize the NotificationJobSerializer, the CloudQueue, and the WNSNotificationJobProcessor _notificationJobSerializer = new NotificationJobSerializer(); _cloudQueueClient = this.account.CreateCloudQueueClient(); _pushNotificationRequestsQueue = _cloudQueueClient.GetQueueReference(ConfigReader.GetConfigValue("RequestQueueName")); _processor = new WNSNotificationJobProcessor(_notificationJobSerializer, _pushNotificationRequestsQueue); Run() Method – poll the Azure Queue for NotificationJobRequest messages & process them:   while (true)             { Trace.WriteLine("Checking for Messages", "Information"); try                 { Parallel.ForEach( this.pushNotificationRequestsQueue.GetMessages(this.batchSize), this.processor.ProcessJobMessageRequest);                 } catch (Exception e)                 { Trace.WriteLine(e.ToString(), "Error");                 } Trace.WriteLine(string.Format("Sleeping for {0} seconds", this.pollIntervalMiliseconds / 1000)); Thread.Sleep(this.pollIntervalMiliseconds);                                            } How I learned to appreciate Win8 There is really only one application architecture for Windows 8 apps: Metro client side and Azure backend – and that is a good thing. With WNS, tier integration is so automated that you don’t even have to leverage a HTTP push API such as SignalR. This is a pretty powerful development paradigm, and has changed the way I look at Windows 8 for RAD business apps. When I originally looked at Win8 and the WinRT API, my first opinion on Win8 dev was as follows – GOOD:WinRT, WRL, C++/CX, WinJS, XAML (& ease of Direct3D integration); BAD: low projected market penetration,.NET lobotomized (Only 8% of .NET 4.5 classes can be used in Win8 non-desktop apps - http://bit.ly/HRuJr7); UGLY:Metro pascal tiles! Perhaps my 80s teenage years gave me a punk reactionary sense of revulsion towards the Partridge Family 70s style that Metro UX seems to have appropriated: On second thought though, it simplifies UI dev to a single paradigm (although UX guys will need to change career) – you will not find an easier app dev environment. Speculation: If LightSwitch is going to support HTML5 client app generation, then its a safe guess to say that vnext will support Win8 Metro XAML - a much easier port from Silverlight XAML. Given the VS2012 LightSwitch integration as a thumbs up from the powers that be at MS, and given that Win8 C#/XAML Metro apps tend towards a streamlined 'golden straight-jacket' cookie cutter app dev style with an Azure back-end supporting Win8 push notifications... --> its easy to extrapolate than LightSwitch vnext could well be the Win8 Metro XAML to Azure RAD tool of choice! The hook is already there - :) Why else have the space next to the HTML Client box? This high level of application development abstraction will facilitate rapid app cookie-cutter architecture-infrastructure frameworks for wrapping any app. This will allow me to avoid too much XAML code-monkeying around & focus on my area of interest: Technical Computing.

    Read the article

  • Windows 7 SP1 not being offered on Windows Update

    - by Ian Boyd
    i have no option to install Windows 7 Service Pack 1 (SP1) on my computer. Why is the option to install Windows 7 SP1 missing from Windows Update? i'm less interested in why the option is missing, and more interested in how to diagnose why the option to install Windows 7 SP1 is being hidden. Following the suggestions in KB2498452 - You do not have the option of downloading Windows 7 SP1 when you use Windows Update to check for updates: Confirm that Windows 7 SP1 is not already installed and that you are not running a prerelease version of Windows 7 SP1 i am not already running SP1, or a pre-release SP1: Check for pending updates Update 976902 may have to be installed on your computer before Windows 7 SP1 will be offered in Windows Update. i already have 976902 installed: Verify that an incompatible version of SafeCentral is not installed on your computer Windows SP1 may not appear in Windows Update if certain versions of SafeCentral are installed on your computer. SafeCentral is a security program that is manufactured by SafeCentral, Inc. i do not have SafeCentral installed (i've never heard of such a thing): Check whether you have Intel integrated graphics driver Igdkmd32.sys or Igdkmd64.sys and whether you upgraded the driver i do not have an Intel GMA: Make sure that you did not use vLite to customize your Windows 7 installation i did not use vLite to customize my Windows 7 installation. Again, i've never heard of such a thing. Update One: Here's proof that i've checked for updates "today" (3/2/2011): And that i'm not being presented the option of installing SP1 (i dispatched an update to Silverlight and a fix for IE9 being hosted in a Direct2D or Direct3D application; so updates themselves do work): Update Two Tried the Windows Update Troubleshooter: Window 7 Service Pack 1 is still not available. Update Three Here is the tail end of windowsupdate.log. It speaks of Evaluating application rules: Found 2 updates and 65 categories in search; evaluated appl. rules of 1324 out of 1832 deployed entities These must be the rules that say i'm not allowed to see SP1: 2011-03-03 09:21:08:091 924 db4 AU Triggering AU detection through DetectNow API 2011-03-03 09:21:08:091 924 db4 AU Triggering Online detection (interactive) 2011-03-03 09:21:08:091 924 950 AU ############# 2011-03-03 09:21:08:092 924 950 AU ## START ## AU: Search for updates 2011-03-03 09:21:08:092 924 950 AU ######### 2011-03-03 09:21:08:093 924 950 AU <<## SUBMITTED ## AU: Search for updates [CallId = {8517376A-B8A3-488B-B4D4-67DFC75788C8}] 2011-03-03 09:21:08:093 924 ca8 Agent ************* 2011-03-03 09:21:08:093 924 ca8 Agent ** START ** Agent: Finding updates [CallerId = AutomaticUpdates] 2011-03-03 09:21:08:093 924 ca8 Agent ********* 2011-03-03 09:21:08:093 924 ca8 Agent * Online = Yes; Ignore download priority = No 2011-03-03 09:21:08:093 924 ca8 Agent * Criteria = "IsInstalled=0 and DeploymentAction='Installation' or IsPresent=1 and DeploymentAction='Uninstallation' or IsInstalled=1 and DeploymentAction='Installation' and RebootRequired=1 or IsInstalled=0 and DeploymentAction='Uninstallation' and RebootRequired=1" 2011-03-03 09:21:08:093 924 ca8 Agent * ServiceID = {7971F918-A847-4430-9279-4A52D1EFE18D} Third party service 2011-03-03 09:21:08:093 924 ca8 Agent * Search Scope = {Machine} 2011-03-03 09:21:08:094 924 ca8 Misc Validating signature for C:\Windows\SoftwareDistribution\WuRedir\9482F4B4-E343-43B6-B170-9A65BC822C77\muv4wuredir.cab: 2011-03-03 09:21:08:097 924 ca8 Misc Microsoft signed: Yes 2011-03-03 09:21:08:287 924 ca8 Misc Validating signature for C:\Windows\SoftwareDistribution\WuRedir\9482F4B4-E343-43B6-B170-9A65BC822C77\muv4wuredir.cab: 2011-03-03 09:21:08:289 924 ca8 Misc Microsoft signed: Yes 2011-03-03 09:21:08:292 924 ca8 Agent Checking for updated auth cab for service 7971f918-a847-4430-9279-4a52d1efe18d at http://download.windowsupdate.com/v9/microsoftupdate/redir/muauth.cab 2011-03-03 09:21:08:292 924 ca8 Misc Validating signature for C:\Windows\SoftwareDistribution\AuthCabs\authcab.cab: 2011-03-03 09:21:08:294 924 ca8 Misc Microsoft signed: Yes 2011-03-03 09:21:08:354 924 ca8 Misc Validating signature for C:\Windows\SoftwareDistribution\AuthCabs\authcab.cab: 2011-03-03 09:21:08:356 924 ca8 Misc Microsoft signed: Yes 2011-03-03 09:21:08:356 924 ca8 Setup Checking for agent SelfUpdate 2011-03-03 09:21:08:356 924 ca8 Setup Client version: Core: 7.3.7600.16385 Aux: 7.3.7600.16385 2011-03-03 09:21:08:357 924 ca8 Misc Validating signature for C:\Windows\SoftwareDistribution\WuRedir\9482F4B4-E343-43B6-B170-9A65BC822C77\muv4wuredir.cab: 2011-03-03 09:21:08:359 924 ca8 Misc Microsoft signed: Yes 2011-03-03 09:21:08:418 924 ca8 Misc Validating signature for C:\Windows\SoftwareDistribution\WuRedir\9482F4B4-E343-43B6-B170-9A65BC822C77\muv4wuredir.cab: 2011-03-03 09:21:08:420 924 ca8 Misc Microsoft signed: Yes 2011-03-03 09:21:08:422 924 ca8 Misc Validating signature for C:\Windows\SoftwareDistribution\SelfUpdate\wuident.cab: 2011-03-03 09:21:08:424 924 ca8 Misc Microsoft signed: Yes 2011-03-03 09:21:08:655 924 ca8 Misc Validating signature for C:\Windows\SoftwareDistribution\SelfUpdate\wuident.cab: 2011-03-03 09:21:08:658 924 ca8 Misc Microsoft signed: Yes 2011-03-03 09:21:08:659 924 ca8 Setup Skipping SelfUpdate check based on the /SKIP directive in wuident 2011-03-03 09:21:08:659 924 ca8 Setup SelfUpdate check completed. SelfUpdate is NOT required. 2011-03-03 09:21:08:808 924 ca8 Misc Validating signature for C:\Windows\SoftwareDistribution\WuRedir\7971F918-A847-4430-9279-4A52D1EFE18D\muv4muredir.cab: 2011-03-03 09:21:08:810 924 ca8 Misc Microsoft signed: Yes 2011-03-03 09:21:08:872 924 ca8 Misc Validating signature for C:\Windows\SoftwareDistribution\WuRedir\7971F918-A847-4430-9279-4A52D1EFE18D\muv4muredir.cab: 2011-03-03 09:21:08:874 924 ca8 Misc Microsoft signed: Yes 2011-03-03 09:21:08:876 924 ca8 PT +++++++++++ PT: Synchronizing server updates +++++++++++ 2011-03-03 09:21:08:877 924 ca8 PT + ServiceId = {7971F918-A847-4430-9279-4A52D1EFE18D}, Server URL = https://www.update.microsoft.com/v6/ClientWebService/client.asmx 2011-03-03 09:21:13:958 924 ca8 Misc Validating signature for C:\Windows\SoftwareDistribution\WuRedir\7971F918-A847-4430-9279-4A52D1EFE18D\muv4muredir.cab: 2011-03-03 09:21:13:960 924 ca8 Misc Microsoft signed: Yes 2011-03-03 09:21:14:083 924 ca8 Misc Validating signature for C:\Windows\SoftwareDistribution\WuRedir\7971F918-A847-4430-9279-4A52D1EFE18D\muv4muredir.cab: 2011-03-03 09:21:14:085 924 ca8 Misc Microsoft signed: Yes 2011-03-03 09:21:14:087 924 ca8 PT +++++++++++ PT: Synchronizing extended update info +++++++++++ 2011-03-03 09:21:14:087 924 ca8 PT + ServiceId = {7971F918-A847-4430-9279-4A52D1EFE18D}, Server URL = https://www.update.microsoft.com/v6/ClientWebService/client.asmx 2011-03-03 09:21:14:395 924 ca8 Agent * Added update {414642E2-5F20-4AD1-AA5A-773061238B5F}.101 to search result 2011-03-03 09:21:14:395 924 ca8 Agent * Added update {56D5FC3D-9AC8-44F1-A248-8C397A24D02F}.100 to search result 2011-03-03 09:21:14:395 924 ca8 Agent * Found 2 updates and 65 categories in search; evaluated appl. rules of 1324 out of 1832 deployed entities 2011-03-03 09:21:14:396 924 ca8 Agent ********* 2011-03-03 09:21:14:396 924 ca8 Agent ** END ** Agent: Finding updates [CallerId = AutomaticUpdates] 2011-03-03 09:21:14:396 924 ca8 Agent ************* 2011-03-03 09:21:14:404 924 ce0 AU >>## RESUMED ## AU: Search for updates [CallId = {8517376A-B8A3-488B-B4D4-67DFC75788C8}] 2011-03-03 09:21:14:404 924 ce0 AU # 2 updates detected 2011-03-03 09:21:14:404 924 ce0 AU ######### 2011-03-03 09:21:14:404 924 ce0 AU ## END ## AU: Search for updates [CallId = {8517376A-B8A3-488B-B4D4-67DFC75788C8}] 2011-03-03 09:21:14:404 924 ce0 AU ############# 2011-03-03 09:21:14:404 924 ce0 AU Successfully wrote event for AU health state:0 2011-03-03 09:21:14:405 924 ce0 AU ############# 2011-03-03 09:21:14:405 924 ce0 AU ## START ## AU: Refresh featured updates info 2011-03-03 09:21:14:405 924 ce0 AU ######### 2011-03-03 09:21:14:405 924 ce0 AU No featured updates available. 2011-03-03 09:21:14:405 924 ce0 AU ######### 2011-03-03 09:21:14:405 924 ce0 AU ## END ## AU: Refresh featured updates info 2011-03-03 09:21:14:405 924 ce0 AU ############# 2011-03-03 09:21:14:405 924 ce0 AU No featured updates notifications to show 2011-03-03 09:21:14:405 924 ce0 AU AU setting next detection timeout to 2011-03-04 08:03:53 2011-03-03 09:21:14:405 924 ce0 AU Setting AU scheduled install time to 2011-03-04 08:00:00 2011-03-03 09:21:14:405 924 ce0 AU Successfully wrote event for AU health state:0 2011-03-03 09:21:14:406 924 ce0 AU Successfully wrote event for AU health state:0 2011-03-03 09:21:14:407 924 db4 AU Getting featured update notifications. fIncludeDismissed = true 2011-03-03 09:21:14:408 924 db4 AU No featured updates available. 2011-03-03 09:21:19:396 924 ca8 Report REPORT EVENT: {633538B3-030E-4CAD-BE6B-33C6ED65AFF1} 2011-03-03 09:21:14:395-0500 1 147 101 {00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000} 0 0 AutomaticUpdates Success Software Synchronization Windows Update Client successfully detected 2 updates. 2011-03-03 09:21:19:396 924 ca8 Report CWERReporter finishing event handling. (00000000) i'm less interested in why the option to install Windows 7 SP1 is missing, and more interested in how to diagnose why the option to install Windows 7 SP1 is being hidden. The KB article says that SP1 will not be offered if your machine doesn't meet some secret special criteria. How can i discover what that secret criteria is? i presume it is logged somewhere. Nor am i particularly interested in a direct download link. i want to learn here. i want to be able to diagnose (i.e. in the future) why an update is not being offered. i'm a superuser here. Rather than others coming up with a checklist of things to try, i want to be able to come up with the checklist.

    Read the article

  • Generating EF Code First model classes from an existing database

    - by Jon Galloway
    Entity Framework Code First is a lightweight way to "turn on" data access for a simple CLR class. As the name implies, the intended use is that you're writing the code first and thinking about the database later. However, I really like the Entity Framework Code First works, and I want to use it in existing projects and projects with pre-existing databases. For example, MVC Music Store comes with a SQL Express database that's pre-loaded with a catalog of music (including genres, artists, and songs), and while it may eventually make sense to load that seed data from a different source, for the MVC 3 release we wanted to keep using the existing database. While I'm not getting the full benefit of Code First - writing code which drives the database schema - I can still benefit from the simplicity of the lightweight code approach. Scott Guthrie blogged about how to use entity framework with an existing database, looking at how you can override the Entity Framework Code First conventions so that it can work with a database which was created following other conventions. That gives you the information you need to create the model classes manually. However, it turns out that with Entity Framework 4 CTP 5, there's a way to generate the model classes from the database schema. Once the grunt work is done, of course, you can go in and modify the model classes as you'd like, but you can save the time and frustration of figuring out things like mapping SQL database types to .NET types. Note that this template requires Entity Framework 4 CTP 5 or later. You can install EF 4 CTP 5 here. Step One: Generate an EF Model from your existing database The code generation system in Entity Framework works from a model. You can add a model to your existing project and delete it when you're done, but I think it's simpler to just spin up a separate project to generate the model classes. When you're done, you can delete the project without affecting your application, or you may choose to keep it around in case you have other database schema updates which require model changes. I chose to add the Model classes to the Models folder of a new MVC 3 application. Right-click the folder and select "Add / New Item..."   Next, select ADO.NET Entity Data Model from the Data Templates list, and name it whatever you want (the name is unimportant).   Next, select "Generate from database." This is important - it's what kicks off the next few steps, which read your database's schema.   Now it's time to point the Entity Data Model Wizard at your existing database. I'll assume you know how to find your database - if not, I covered that a bit in the MVC Music Store tutorial section on Models and Data. Select your database, uncheck the "Save entity connection settings in Web.config" (since we won't be using them within the application), and click Next.   Now you can select the database objects you'd like modeled. I just selected all tables and clicked Finish.   And there's your model. If you want, you can make additional changes here before going on to generate the code.   Step Two: Add the DbContext Generator Like most code generation systems in Visual Studio lately, Entity Framework uses T4 templates which allow for some control over how the code is generated. K Scott Allen wrote a detailed article on T4 Templates and the Entity Framework on MSDN recently, if you'd like to know more. Fortunately for us, there's already a template that does just what we need without any customization. Right-click a blank space in the Entity Framework model surface and select "Add Code Generation Item..." Select the Code groupt in the Installed Templates section and pick the ADO.NET DbContext Generator. If you don't see this listed, make sure you've got EF 4 CTP 5 installed and that you're looking at the Code templates group. Note that the DbContext Generator template is similar to the EF POCO template which came out last year, but with "fix up" code (unnecessary in EF Code First) removed.   As soon as you do this, you'll two terrifying Security Warnings - unless you click the "Do not show this message again" checkbox the first time. It will also be displayed (twice) every time you rebuild the project, so I checked the box and no immediate harm befell my computer (fingers crossed!).   Here's the payoff: two templates (filenames ending with .tt) have been added to the project, and they've generated the code I needed.   The "MusicStoreEntities.Context.tt" template built a DbContext class which holds the entity collections, and the "MusicStoreEntities.tt" template build a separate class for each table I selected earlier. We'll customize them in the next step. I recommend copying all the generated .cs files into your application at this point, since accidentally rebuilding the generation project will overwrite your changes if you leave them there. Step Three: Modify and use your POCO entity classes Note: I made a bunch of tweaks to my POCO classes after they were generated. You don't have to do any of this, but I think it's important that you can - they're your classes, and EF Code First respects that. Modify them as you need for your application, or don't. The Context class derives from DbContext, which is what turns on the EF Code First features. It holds a DbSet for each entity. Think of DbSet as a simple List, but with Entity Framework features turned on.   //------------------------------------------------------------------------------ // <auto-generated> // This code was generated from a template. // // Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if // the code is regenerated. // </auto-generated> //------------------------------------------------------------------------------ namespace EF_CodeFirst_From_Existing_Database.Models { using System; using System.Data.Entity; public partial class Entities : DbContext { public Entities() : base("name=Entities") { } public DbSet<Album> Albums { get; set; } public DbSet<Artist> Artists { get; set; } public DbSet<Cart> Carts { get; set; } public DbSet<Genre> Genres { get; set; } public DbSet<OrderDetail> OrderDetails { get; set; } public DbSet<Order> Orders { get; set; } } } It's a pretty lightweight class as generated, so I just took out the comments, set the namespace, removed the constructor, and formatted it a bit. Done. If I wanted, though, I could have added or removed DbSets, overridden conventions, etc. using System.Data.Entity; namespace MvcMusicStore.Models { public class MusicStoreEntities : DbContext { public DbSet Albums { get; set; } public DbSet Genres { get; set; } public DbSet Artists { get; set; } public DbSet Carts { get; set; } public DbSet Orders { get; set; } public DbSet OrderDetails { get; set; } } } Next, it's time to look at the individual classes. Some of mine were pretty simple - for the Cart class, I just need to remove the header and clean up the namespace. //------------------------------------------------------------------------------ // // This code was generated from a template. // // Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if // the code is regenerated. // //------------------------------------------------------------------------------ namespace EF_CodeFirst_From_Existing_Database.Models { using System; using System.Collections.Generic; public partial class Cart { // Primitive properties public int RecordId { get; set; } public string CartId { get; set; } public int AlbumId { get; set; } public int Count { get; set; } public System.DateTime DateCreated { get; set; } // Navigation properties public virtual Album Album { get; set; } } } I did a bit more customization on the Album class. Here's what was generated: //------------------------------------------------------------------------------ // // This code was generated from a template. // // Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if // the code is regenerated. // //------------------------------------------------------------------------------ namespace EF_CodeFirst_From_Existing_Database.Models { using System; using System.Collections.Generic; public partial class Album { public Album() { this.Carts = new HashSet(); this.OrderDetails = new HashSet(); } // Primitive properties public int AlbumId { get; set; } public int GenreId { get; set; } public int ArtistId { get; set; } public string Title { get; set; } public decimal Price { get; set; } public string AlbumArtUrl { get; set; } // Navigation properties public virtual Artist Artist { get; set; } public virtual Genre Genre { get; set; } public virtual ICollection Carts { get; set; } public virtual ICollection OrderDetails { get; set; } } } I removed the header, changed the namespace, and removed some of the navigation properties. One nice thing about EF Code First is that you don't have to have a property for each database column or foreign key. In the Music Store sample, for instance, we build the app up using code first and start with just a few columns, adding in fields and navigation properties as the application needs them. EF Code First handles the columsn we've told it about and doesn't complain about the others. Here's the basic class: using System.ComponentModel; using System.ComponentModel.DataAnnotations; using System.Web.Mvc; using System.Collections.Generic; namespace MvcMusicStore.Models { public class Album { public int AlbumId { get; set; } public int GenreId { get; set; } public int ArtistId { get; set; } public string Title { get; set; } public decimal Price { get; set; } public string AlbumArtUrl { get; set; } public virtual Genre Genre { get; set; } public virtual Artist Artist { get; set; } public virtual List OrderDetails { get; set; } } } It's my class, not Entity Framework's, so I'm free to do what I want with it. I added a bunch of MVC 3 annotations for scaffolding and validation support, as shown below: using System.ComponentModel; using System.ComponentModel.DataAnnotations; using System.Web.Mvc; using System.Collections.Generic; namespace MvcMusicStore.Models { [Bind(Exclude = "AlbumId")] public class Album { [ScaffoldColumn(false)] public int AlbumId { get; set; } [DisplayName("Genre")] public int GenreId { get; set; } [DisplayName("Artist")] public int ArtistId { get; set; } [Required(ErrorMessage = "An Album Title is required")] [StringLength(160)] public string Title { get; set; } [Required(ErrorMessage = "Price is required")] [Range(0.01, 100.00, ErrorMessage = "Price must be between 0.01 and 100.00")] public decimal Price { get; set; } [DisplayName("Album Art URL")] [StringLength(1024)] public string AlbumArtUrl { get; set; } public virtual Genre Genre { get; set; } public virtual Artist Artist { get; set; } public virtual List<OrderDetail> OrderDetails { get; set; } } } The end result was that I had working EF Code First model code for the finished application. You can follow along through the tutorial to see how I built up to the finished model classes, starting with simple 2-3 property classes and building up to the full working schema. Thanks to Diego Vega (on the Entity Framework team) for pointing me to the DbContext template.

    Read the article

  • A Communication System for XAML Applications

    - by psheriff
    In any application, you want to keep the coupling between any two or more objects as loose as possible. Coupling happens when one class contains a property that is used in another class, or uses another class in one of its methods. If you have this situation, then this is called strong or tight coupling. One popular design pattern to help with keeping objects loosely coupled is called the Mediator design pattern. The basics of this pattern are very simple; avoid one object directly talking to another object, and instead use another class to mediate between the two. As with most of my blog posts, the purpose is to introduce you to a simple approach to using a message broker, not all of the fine details. IPDSAMessageBroker Interface As with most implementations of a design pattern, you typically start with an interface or an abstract base class. In this particular instance, an Interface will work just fine. The interface for our Message Broker class just contains a single method “SendMessage” and one event “MessageReceived”. public delegate void MessageReceivedEventHandler( object sender, PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs e); public interface IPDSAMessageBroker{  void SendMessage(PDSAMessageBrokerMessage msg);   event MessageReceivedEventHandler MessageReceived;} PDSAMessageBrokerMessage Class As you can see in the interface, the SendMessage method requires a type of PDSAMessageBrokerMessage to be passed to it. This class simply has a MessageName which is a ‘string’ type and a MessageBody property which is of the type ‘object’ so you can pass whatever you want in the body. You might pass a string in the body, or a complete Customer object. The MessageName property will help the receiver of the message know what is in the MessageBody property. public class PDSAMessageBrokerMessage{  public PDSAMessageBrokerMessage()  {  }   public PDSAMessageBrokerMessage(string name, object body)  {    MessageName = name;    MessageBody = body;  }   public string MessageName { get; set; }   public object MessageBody { get; set; }} PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs Class As our message broker class will be raising an event that others can respond to, it is a good idea to create your own event argument class. This class will inherit from the System.EventArgs class and add a couple of additional properties. The properties are the MessageName and Message. The MessageName property is simply a string value. The Message property is a type of a PDSAMessageBrokerMessage class. public class PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs : EventArgs{  public PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs()  {  }   public PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs(string name,     PDSAMessageBrokerMessage msg)  {    MessageName = name;    Message = msg;  }   public string MessageName { get; set; }   public PDSAMessageBrokerMessage Message { get; set; }} PDSAMessageBroker Class Now that you have an interface class and a class to pass a message through an event, it is time to create your actual PDSAMessageBroker class. This class implements the SendMessage method and will also create the event handler for the delegate created in your Interface. public class PDSAMessageBroker : IPDSAMessageBroker{  public void SendMessage(PDSAMessageBrokerMessage msg)  {    PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs args;     args = new PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs(      msg.MessageName, msg);     RaiseMessageReceived(args);  }   public event MessageReceivedEventHandler MessageReceived;   protected void RaiseMessageReceived(    PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs e)  {    if (null != MessageReceived)      MessageReceived(this, e);  }} The SendMessage method will take a PDSAMessageBrokerMessage object as an argument. It then creates an instance of a PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs class, passing to the constructor two items: the MessageName from the PDSAMessageBrokerMessage object and also the object itself. It may seem a little redundant to pass in the message name when that same message name is part of the message, but it does make consuming the event and checking for the message name a little cleaner – as you will see in the next section. Create a Global Message Broker In your WPF application, create an instance of this message broker class in the App class located in the App.xaml file. Create a public property in the App class and create a new instance of that class in the OnStartUp event procedure as shown in the following code: public partial class App : Application{  public PDSAMessageBroker MessageBroker { get; set; }   protected override void OnStartup(StartupEventArgs e)  {    base.OnStartup(e);     MessageBroker = new PDSAMessageBroker();  }} Sending and Receiving Messages Let’s assume you have a user control that you load into a control on your main window and you want to send a message from that user control to the main window. You might have the main window display a message box, or put a string into a status bar as shown in Figure 1. Figure 1: The main window can receive and send messages The first thing you do in the main window is to hook up an event procedure to the MessageReceived event of the global message broker. This is done in the constructor of the main window: public MainWindow(){  InitializeComponent();   (Application.Current as App).MessageBroker.     MessageReceived += new MessageReceivedEventHandler(       MessageBroker_MessageReceived);} One piece of code you might not be familiar with is accessing a property defined in the App class of your XAML application. Within the App.Xaml file is a class named App that inherits from the Application object. You access the global instance of this App class by using Application.Current. You cast Application.Current to ‘App’ prior to accessing any of the public properties or methods you defined in the App class. Thus, the code (Application.Current as App).MessageBroker, allows you to get at the MessageBroker property defined in the App class. In the MessageReceived event procedure in the main window (shown below) you can now check to see if the MessageName property of the PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs is equal to “StatusBar” and if it is, then display the message body into the status bar text block control. void MessageBroker_MessageReceived(object sender,   PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs e){  switch (e.MessageName)  {    case "StatusBar":      tbStatus.Text = e.Message.MessageBody.ToString();      break;  }} In the Page 1 user control’s Loaded event procedure you will send the message “StatusBar” through the global message broker to any listener using the following code: private void UserControl_Loaded(object sender,  RoutedEventArgs e){  // Send Status Message  (Application.Current as App).MessageBroker.    SendMessage(new PDSAMessageBrokerMessage("StatusBar",      "This is Page 1"));} Since the main window is listening for the message ‘StatusBar’, it will display the value “This is Page 1” in the status bar at the bottom of the main window. Sending a Message to a User Control The previous example sent a message from the user control to the main window. You can also send messages from the main window to any listener as well. Remember that the global message broker is really just a broadcaster to anyone who has hooked into the MessageReceived event. In the constructor of the user control named ucPage1 you can hook into the global message broker’s MessageReceived event. You can then listen for any messages that are sent to this control by using a similar switch-case structure like that in the main window. public ucPage1(){  InitializeComponent();   // Hook to the Global Message Broker  (Application.Current as App).MessageBroker.    MessageReceived += new MessageReceivedEventHandler(      MessageBroker_MessageReceived);} void MessageBroker_MessageReceived(object sender,  PDSAMessageBrokerEventArgs e){  // Look for messages intended for Page 1  switch (e.MessageName)  {    case "ForPage1":      MessageBox.Show(e.Message.MessageBody.ToString());      break;  }} Once the ucPage1 user control has been loaded into the main window you can then send a message using the following code: private void btnSendToPage1_Click(object sender,  RoutedEventArgs e){  PDSAMessageBrokerMessage arg =     new PDSAMessageBrokerMessage();   arg.MessageName = "ForPage1";  arg.MessageBody = "Message For Page 1";   // Send a message to Page 1  (Application.Current as App).MessageBroker.SendMessage(arg);} Since the MessageName matches what is in the ucPage1 MessageReceived event procedure, ucPage1 can do anything in response to that event. It is important to note that when the message gets sent it is sent to all MessageReceived event procedures, not just the one that is looking for a message called “ForPage1”. If the user control ucPage1 is not loaded and this message is broadcast, but no other code is listening for it, then it is simply ignored. Remove Event Handler In each class where you add an event handler to the MessageReceived event you need to make sure to remove those event handlers when you are done. Failure to do so can cause a strong reference to the class and thus not allow that object to be garbage collected. In each of your user control’s make sure in the Unloaded event to remove the event handler. private void UserControl_Unloaded(object sender, RoutedEventArgs e){  if (_MessageBroker != null)    _MessageBroker.MessageReceived -=         _MessageBroker_MessageReceived;} Problems with Message Brokering As with most “global” classes or classes that hook up events to other classes, garbage collection is something you need to consider. Just the simple act of hooking up an event procedure to a global event handler creates a reference between your user control and the message broker in the App class. This means that even when your user control is removed from your UI, the class will still be in memory because of the reference to the message broker. This can cause messages to still being handled even though the UI is not being displayed. It is up to you to make sure you remove those event handlers as discussed in the previous section. If you don’t, then the garbage collector cannot release those objects. Instead of using events to send messages from one object to another you might consider registering your objects with a central message broker. This message broker now becomes a collection class into which you pass an object and what messages that object wishes to receive. You do end up with the same problem however. You have to un-register your objects; otherwise they still stay in memory. To alleviate this problem you can look into using the WeakReference class as a method to store your objects so they can be garbage collected if need be. Discussing Weak References is beyond the scope of this post, but you can look this up on the web. Summary In this blog post you learned how to create a simple message broker system that will allow you to send messages from one object to another without having to reference objects directly. This does reduce the coupling between objects in your application. You do need to remember to get rid of any event handlers prior to your objects going out of scope or you run the risk of having memory leaks and events being called even though you can no longer access the object that is responding to that event. NOTE: You can download the sample code for this article by visiting my website at http://www.pdsa.com/downloads. Select “Tips & Tricks”, then select “A Communication System for XAML Applications” from the drop down list.

    Read the article

  • Lot's of errors by insserv on apt-get operations after trying to install tomcat

    - by yankee
    I wanted to install tomcat on my Debian 6.0.4 machine. I tried apt-get install tomcat6-user which worked fine. But then I changed my mind about the user installation and wanted to install the package tomcat6. This resulted in a bunch of errors (see below). Now whatever I try to do with apt-get or with aptitude (trying to remove tomcat6-user, trying to remove tomcat6, trying to perform an apt-get upgrade,...) just results in the same list of errors. How did I manage that? And how can I fix it? # apt-get install tomcat6 Reading package lists... Done Building dependency tree Reading state information... Done The following extra packages will be installed: authbind Suggested packages: tomcat6-docs tomcat6-admin tomcat6-examples libtcnative-1 The following NEW packages will be installed: authbind tomcat6 0 upgraded, 2 newly installed, 0 to remove and 32 not upgraded. Need to get 56.6 kB of archives. After this operation, 442 kB of additional disk space will be used. Do you want to continue [Y/n]? Get:1 http://mirror.hetzner.de/debian/packages/ squeeze/main authbind amd64 1.2.0 [17.3 kB] Get:2 http://mirror.hetzner.de/debian/security/ squeeze/updates/main tomcat6 all 6.0.35-1+squeeze2 [39.3 kB] Fetched 56.6 kB in 0s (441 kB/s) Preconfiguring packages ... Selecting previously deselected package authbind. (Reading database ... 34717 files and directories currently installed.) Unpacking authbind (from .../authbind_1.2.0_amd64.deb) ... Selecting previously deselected package tomcat6. Unpacking tomcat6 (from .../tomcat6_6.0.35-1+squeeze2_all.deb) ... Processing triggers for man-db ... Setting up authbind (1.2.0) ... Setting up tomcat6 (6.0.35-1+squeeze2) ... Creating config file /etc/default/tomcat6 with new version Adding system user `tomcat6' (UID 108) ... Adding new user `tomcat6' (UID 108) with group `tomcat6' ... Not creating home directory `/usr/share/tomcat6'. insserv: warning: script 'S99iptables-custom' missing LSB tags and overrides insserv: warning: script 'iptables-custom' missing LSB tags and overrides insserv: There is a loop at service iptables-custom if started insserv: There is a loop between service rmnologin and mountnfs if started insserv: loop involving service mountnfs at depth 6 insserv: loop involving service networking at depth 5 insserv: loop involving service kbd at depth 9 insserv: There is a loop between service rmnologin and mountall-bootclean if started insserv: loop involving service mountall-bootclean at depth 5 insserv: loop involving service mountall at depth 4 insserv: There is a loop between service iptables-custom and lvm2 if started insserv: loop involving service lvm2 at depth 2 insserv: loop involving service udev at depth 1 insserv: There is a loop at service rmnologin if started insserv: There is a loop between service iptables-custom and checkroot if started insserv: loop involving service checkroot at depth 2 insserv: loop involving service keyboard-setup at depth 1 insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Max recursions depth 99 reached insserv: loop involving service courier-imap-ssl at depth 1 insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: loop involving service hwclockfirst at depth 2 insserv: loop involving service mountoverflowtmp at depth 9 insserv: loop involving service checkfs at depth 6 insserv: loop involving service mdadm-raid at depth 4 insserv: loop involving service hostname at depth 3 insserv: There is a loop between service iptables-custom and ifupdown-clean if started insserv: loop involving service ifupdown-clean at depth 5 insserv: There is a loop between service rmnologin and mountall if started insserv: There is a loop between service iptables-custom and mountdevsubfs if started insserv: loop involving service mountdevsubfs at depth 1 insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: loop involving service mtab at depth 6 insserv: There is a loop between service rmnologin and mountoverflowtmp if started insserv: Starting iptables-custom depends on rmnologin and therefore on system facility `$all' which can not be true! insserv: exiting now without changing boot order! update-rc.d: error: insserv rejected the script header dpkg: error processing tomcat6 (--configure): subprocess installed post-installation script returned error exit status 1 configured to not write apport reports Errors were encountered while processing: tomcat6 E: Sub-process /usr/bin/dpkg returned an error code (1)

    Read the article

  • Ubuntu 14.04 Failed to load module udlfb

    - by jar276705
    DisplayLink doesn't load and run. The adapter is recognized and /dev/FB1 is created. USB bus info: Bus 001 Device 006: ID 17e9:0198 DisplayLink Xorg.0.log: X.Org X Server 1.15.1 Release Date: 2014-04-13 [ 44708.386] X Protocol Version 11, Revision 0 [ 44708.389] Build Operating System: Linux 3.2.0-37-generic i686 Ubuntu [ 44708.392] Current Operating System: Linux rrl 3.13.0-24-generic #46-Ubuntu SMP Thu Apr 10 19:08:14 UTC 2014 i686 [ 44708.392] Kernel command line: BOOT_IMAGE=/boot/vmlinuz-3.13.0-24-generic root=UUID=6b719a77-29e0-4668-8f16-57d0d3a73a3f ro quiet splash vt.handoff=7 [ 44708.399] Build Date: 16 April 2014 01:40:08PM [ 44708.402] xorg-server 2:1.15.1-0ubuntu2 (For technical support please see http://www.ubuntu.com/support) [ 44708.405] Current version of pixman: 0.30.2 [ 44708.412] Before reporting problems, check http://wiki.x.org to make sure that you have the latest version. [ 44708.412] Markers: (--) probed, (**) from config file, (==) default setting, (++) from command line, (!!) notice, (II) informational, (WW) warning, (EE) error, (NI) not implemented, (??) unknown. [ 44708.427] (==) Log file: "/var/log/Xorg.0.log", Time: Thu May 1 09:38:27 2014 [ 44708.431] (==) Using config file: "/etc/X11/xorg.conf" [ 44708.434] (==) Using system config directory "/usr/share/X11/xorg.conf.d" [ 44708.435] (==) ServerLayout "X.org Configured" [ 44708.435] (**) |-->Screen "DisplayLinkScreen" (0) [ 44708.435] (**) | |-->Monitor "DisplayLinkMonitor" [ 44708.435] (**) | |-->Device "DisplayLinkDevice" [ 44708.435] (**) |-->Screen "Screen0" (1) [ 44708.435] (**) | |-->Monitor "Monitor0" [ 44708.435] (**) | |-->Device "Card0" [ 44708.435] (**) |-->Input Device "Mouse0" [ 44708.435] (**) |-->Input Device "Keyboard0" [ 44708.435] (==) Automatically adding devices [ 44708.435] (==) Automatically enabling devices [ 44708.435] (==) Automatically adding GPU devices [ 44708.435] (WW) The directory "/usr/share/fonts/X11/cyrillic" does not exist. [ 44708.435] Entry deleted from font path. [ 44708.435] (WW) The directory "/usr/share/fonts/X11/75dpi/" does not exist. [ 44708.435] Entry deleted from font path. [ 44708.435] (WW) The directory "/usr/share/fonts/X11/75dpi" does not exist. [ 44708.435] Entry deleted from font path. [ 44708.435] (WW) The directory "/usr/share/fonts/X11/cyrillic" does not exist. [ 44708.435] Entry deleted from font path. [ 44708.435] (WW) The directory "/usr/share/fonts/X11/75dpi/" does not exist. [ 44708.435] Entry deleted from font path. [ 44708.435] (WW) The directory "/usr/share/fonts/X11/75dpi" does not exist. [ 44708.435] Entry deleted from font path. [ 44708.435] (**) FontPath set to: /usr/share/fonts/X11/misc, /usr/share/fonts/X11/100dpi/:unscaled, /usr/share/fonts/X11/Type1, /usr/share/fonts/X11/100dpi, built-ins, /usr/share/fonts/X11/misc, /usr/share/fonts/X11/100dpi/:unscaled, /usr/share/fonts/X11/Type1, /usr/share/fonts/X11/100dpi, built-ins [ 44708.435] (**) ModulePath set to "/usr/lib/xorg/modules" [ 44708.435] (WW) Hotplugging is on, devices using drivers 'kbd', 'mouse' or 'vmmouse' will be disabled. [ 44708.435] (WW) Disabling Mouse0 [ 44708.435] (WW) Disabling Keyboard0 [ 44708.435] (II) Loader magic: 0xb77106c0 [ 44708.435] (II) Module ABI versions: [ 44708.435] X.Org ANSI C Emulation: 0.4 [ 44708.435] X.Org Video Driver: 15.0 [ 44708.435] X.Org XInput driver : 20.0 [ 44708.435] X.Org Server Extension : 8.0 [ 44708.436] (II) xfree86: Adding drm device (/dev/dri/card0) [ 44708.436] (II) xfree86: Adding drm device (/dev/dri/card1) [ 44708.437] (--) PCI:*(0:1:5:0) 1002:9616:105b:0e26 rev 0, Mem @ 0xf0000000/134217728, 0xfeae0000/65536, 0xfe900000/1048576, I/O @ 0x0000b000/256 [ 44708.441] Initializing built-in extension Generic Event Extension [ 44708.444] Initializing built-in extension SHAPE [ 44708.448] Initializing built-in extension MIT-SHM [ 44708.452] Initializing built-in extension XInputExtension [ 44708.456] Initializing built-in extension XTEST [ 44708.460] Initializing built-in extension BIG-REQUESTS [ 44708.464] Initializing built-in extension SYNC [ 44708.468] Initializing built-in extension XKEYBOARD [ 44708.471] Initializing built-in extension XC-MISC [ 44708.475] Initializing built-in extension SECURITY [ 44708.479] Initializing built-in extension XINERAMA [ 44708.483] Initializing built-in extension XFIXES [ 44708.487] Initializing built-in extension RENDER [ 44708.491] Initializing built-in extension RANDR [ 44708.494] Initializing built-in extension COMPOSITE [ 44708.498] Initializing built-in extension DAMAGE [ 44708.502] Initializing built-in extension MIT-SCREEN-SAVER [ 44708.506] Initializing built-in extension DOUBLE-BUFFER [ 44708.510] Initializing built-in extension RECORD [ 44708.513] Initializing built-in extension DPMS [ 44708.517] Initializing built-in extension Present [ 44708.521] Initializing built-in extension DRI3 [ 44708.525] Initializing built-in extension X-Resource [ 44708.528] Initializing built-in extension XVideo [ 44708.532] Initializing built-in extension XVideo-MotionCompensation [ 44708.535] Initializing built-in extension SELinux [ 44708.539] Initializing built-in extension XFree86-VidModeExtension [ 44708.542] Initializing built-in extension XFree86-DGA [ 44708.546] Initializing built-in extension XFree86-DRI [ 44708.549] Initializing built-in extension DRI2 [ 44708.549] (II) "glx" will be loaded. This was enabled by default and also specified in the config file. [ 44708.549] (WW) "xmir" is not to be loaded by default. Skipping. [ 44708.549] (II) LoadModule: "glx" [ 44708.549] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/extensions/libglx.so [ 44708.550] (II) Module glx: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 44708.550] compiled for 1.15.1, module version = 1.0.0 [ 44708.550] ABI class: X.Org Server Extension, version 8.0 [ 44708.550] (==) AIGLX enabled [ 44708.553] Loading extension GLX [ 44708.553] (II) LoadModule: "udlfb" [ 44708.554] (WW) Warning, couldn't open module udlfb [ 44708.554] (II) UnloadModule: "udlfb" [ 44708.554] (II) Unloading udlfb [ 44708.554] (EE) Failed to load module "udlfb" (module does not exist, 0) [ 44708.554] (II) LoadModule: "modesetting" [ 44708.554] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/drivers/modesetting_drv.so [ 44708.554] (II) Module modesetting: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 44708.554] compiled for 1.15.0, module version = 0.8.1 [ 44708.554] Module class: X.Org Video Driver [ 44708.554] ABI class: X.Org Video Driver, version 15.0 [ 44708.554] (==) Matched fglrx as autoconfigured driver 0 [ 44708.554] (==) Matched ati as autoconfigured driver 1 [ 44708.554] (==) Matched fglrx as autoconfigured driver 2 [ 44708.554] (==) Matched ati as autoconfigured driver 3 [ 44708.554] (==) Matched modesetting as autoconfigured driver 4 [ 44708.554] (==) Matched fbdev as autoconfigured driver 5 [ 44708.554] (==) Matched vesa as autoconfigured driver 6 [ 44708.554] (==) Assigned the driver to the xf86ConfigLayout [ 44708.554] (II) LoadModule: "fglrx" [ 44708.554] (WW) Warning, couldn't open module fglrx [ 44708.554] (II) UnloadModule: "fglrx" [ 44708.554] (II) Unloading fglrx [ 44708.554] (EE) Failed to load module "fglrx" (module does not exist, 0) [ 44708.554] (II) LoadModule: "ati" [ 44708.554] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/drivers/ati_drv.so [ 44708.554] (II) Module ati: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 44708.554] compiled for 1.15.0, module version = 7.3.0 [ 44708.554] Module class: X.Org Video Driver [ 44708.554] ABI class: X.Org Video Driver, version 15.0 [ 44708.554] (II) LoadModule: "radeon" [ 44708.555] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/drivers/radeon_drv.so [ 44708.555] (II) Module radeon: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 44708.555] compiled for 1.15.0, module version = 7.3.0 [ 44708.555] Module class: X.Org Video Driver [ 44708.555] ABI class: X.Org Video Driver, version 15.0 [ 44708.555] (II) LoadModule: "modesetting" [ 44708.555] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/drivers/modesetting_drv.so [ 44708.555] (II) Module modesetting: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 44708.555] compiled for 1.15.0, module version = 0.8.1 [ 44708.555] Module class: X.Org Video Driver [ 44708.555] ABI class: X.Org Video Driver, version 15.0 [ 44708.555] (II) UnloadModule: "modesetting" [ 44708.555] (II) Unloading modesetting [ 44708.555] (II) Failed to load module "modesetting" (already loaded, 0) [ 44708.555] (II) LoadModule: "fbdev" [ 44708.555] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/drivers/fbdev_drv.so [ 44708.555] (II) Module fbdev: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 44708.555] compiled for 1.15.0, module version = 0.4.4 [ 44708.555] Module class: X.Org Video Driver [ 44708.555] ABI class: X.Org Video Driver, version 15.0 [ 44708.555] (II) LoadModule: "vesa" [ 44708.555] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/drivers/vesa_drv.so [ 44708.555] (II) Module vesa: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 44708.555] compiled for 1.15.0, module version = 2.3.3 [ 44708.555] Module class: X.Org Video Driver [ 44708.555] ABI class: X.Org Video Driver, version 15.0 [ 44708.555] (II) modesetting: Driver for Modesetting Kernel Drivers: kms [ 44708.555] (II) RADEON: Driver for ATI Radeon chipsets: [ 44708.560] (II) FBDEV: driver for framebuffer: fbdev [ 44708.560] (II) VESA: driver for VESA chipsets: vesa [ 44708.560] (--) using VT number 7 [ 44708.578] (II) modesetting(0): using drv /dev/dri/card0 [ 44708.578] (II) modesetting(G0): using drv /dev/dri/card1 [ 44708.578] (WW) Falling back to old probe method for fbdev [ 44708.578] (II) Loading sub module "fbdevhw" [ 44708.578] (II) LoadModule: "fbdevhw" [ 44708.578] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/libfbdevhw.so [ 44708.578] (II) Module fbdevhw: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 44708.578] compiled for 1.15.1, module version = 0.0.2 [ 44708.578] ABI class: X.Org Video Driver, version 15.0 [ 44708.578] (WW) Falling back to old probe method for vesa [ 44708.578] (**) modesetting(0): Depth 16, (--) framebuffer bpp 16 [ 44708.578] (==) modesetting(0): RGB weight 565 [ 44708.578] (==) modesetting(0): Default visual is TrueColor [ 44708.578] (II) modesetting(0): ShadowFB: preferred YES, enabled YES [ 44708.608] (II) modesetting(0): Output VGA-0 using monitor section DisplayLinkMonitor [ 44708.610] (II) modesetting(0): Output DVI-0 has no monitor section [ 44708.640] (II) modesetting(0): EDID for output VGA-0 [ 44708.640] (II) modesetting(0): Manufacturer: ACR Model: 74 Serial#: 2483090993 [ 44708.640] (II) modesetting(0): Year: 2009 Week: 40 [ 44708.640] (II) modesetting(0): EDID Version: 1.3 [ 44708.640] (II) modesetting(0): Analog Display Input, Input Voltage Level: 0.700/0.700 V [ 44708.640] (II) modesetting(0): Sync: Separate [ 44708.640] (II) modesetting(0): Max Image Size [cm]: horiz.: 53 vert.: 29 [ 44708.640] (II) modesetting(0): Gamma: 2.20 [ 44708.640] (II) modesetting(0): DPMS capabilities: StandBy Suspend Off; RGB/Color Display [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): First detailed timing is preferred mode [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): redX: 0.649 redY: 0.338 greenX: 0.289 greenY: 0.609 [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): blueX: 0.146 blueY: 0.070 whiteX: 0.313 whiteY: 0.329 [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): Supported established timings: [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): 720x400@70Hz [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): 640x480@60Hz [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): 640x480@72Hz [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): 640x480@75Hz [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): 800x600@56Hz [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): 800x600@60Hz [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): 800x600@72Hz [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): 800x600@75Hz [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): 1024x768@60Hz [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): 1024x768@70Hz [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): 1024x768@75Hz [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): 1280x1024@75Hz [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): Manufacturer's mask: 0 [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): Supported standard timings: [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): #0: hsize: 1280 vsize 1024 refresh: 60 vid: 32897 [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): #1: hsize: 1152 vsize 864 refresh: 75 vid: 20337 [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): #2: hsize: 1440 vsize 900 refresh: 60 vid: 149 [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): #3: hsize: 1440 vsize 900 refresh: 75 vid: 3989 [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): #4: hsize: 1600 vsize 1200 refresh: 60 vid: 16553 [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): #5: hsize: 1680 vsize 1050 refresh: 60 vid: 179 [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): Supported detailed timing: [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): clock: 138.5 MHz Image Size: 531 x 298 mm [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): h_active: 1920 h_sync: 1968 h_sync_end 2000 h_blank_end 2080 h_border: 0 [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): v_active: 1080 v_sync: 1083 v_sync_end 1088 v_blanking: 1111 v_border: 0 [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): Monitor name: H243H [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): Ranges: V min: 56 V max: 76 Hz, H min: 31 H max: 83 kHz, PixClock max 185 MHz [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): Serial No: LEW0C0044002 [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): EDID (in hex): [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): 00ffffffffffff000472740031f60094 [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): 2813010368351d78ea6085a6564a9c25 [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): 125054afcf008180714f9500950fa940 [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): b300010101011a3680a070381f403020 [ 44708.641] (II) modesetting(0): 3500132a2100001a000000fc00483234 [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): 33480a20202020202020000000fd0038 [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): 4c1f5312000a202020202020000000ff [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): 004c45573043303034343030320a003c [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): Printing probed modes for output VGA-0 [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): Modeline "1280x1024"x75.0 135.00 1280 1296 1440 1688 1024 1025 1028 1066 +hsync +vsync (80.0 kHz UeP) [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): Modeline "1920x1080"x59.9 138.50 1920 1968 2000 2080 1080 1083 1088 1111 +hsync -vsync (66.6 kHz eP) [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): Modeline "1600x1200"x60.0 162.00 1600 1664 1856 2160 1200 1201 1204 1250 +hsync +vsync (75.0 kHz e) [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): Modeline "1680x1050"x60.0 146.25 1680 1784 1960 2240 1050 1053 1059 1089 -hsync +vsync (65.3 kHz e) [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): Modeline "1280x1024"x60.0 108.00 1280 1328 1440 1688 1024 1025 1028 1066 +hsync +vsync (64.0 kHz e) [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): Modeline "1440x900"x75.0 136.75 1440 1536 1688 1936 900 903 909 942 -hsync +vsync (70.6 kHz e) [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): Modeline "1440x900"x59.9 106.50 1440 1520 1672 1904 900 903 909 934 -hsync +vsync (55.9 kHz e) [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): Modeline "1152x864"x75.0 108.00 1152 1216 1344 1600 864 865 868 900 +hsync +vsync (67.5 kHz e) [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): Modeline "1024x768"x75.1 78.80 1024 1040 1136 1312 768 769 772 800 +hsync +vsync (60.1 kHz e) [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): Modeline "1024x768"x70.1 75.00 1024 1048 1184 1328 768 771 777 806 -hsync -vsync (56.5 kHz e) [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): Modeline "1024x768"x60.0 65.00 1024 1048 1184 1344 768 771 777 806 -hsync -vsync (48.4 kHz e) [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): Modeline "800x600"x72.2 50.00 800 856 976 1040 600 637 643 666 +hsync +vsync (48.1 kHz e) [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): Modeline "800x600"x75.0 49.50 800 816 896 1056 600 601 604 625 +hsync +vsync (46.9 kHz e) [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): Modeline "800x600"x60.3 40.00 800 840 968 1056 600 601 605 628 +hsync +vsync (37.9 kHz e) [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): Modeline "800x600"x56.2 36.00 800 824 896 1024 600 601 603 625 +hsync +vsync (35.2 kHz e) [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): Modeline "640x480"x75.0 31.50 640 656 720 840 480 481 484 500 -hsync -vsync (37.5 kHz e) [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): Modeline "640x480"x72.8 31.50 640 664 704 832 480 489 491 520 -hsync -vsync (37.9 kHz e) [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): Modeline "640x480"x60.0 25.20 640 656 752 800 480 490 492 525 -hsync -vsync (31.5 kHz e) [ 44708.642] (II) modesetting(0): Modeline "720x400"x70.1 28.32 720 738 846 900 400 412 414 449 -hsync +vsync (31.5 kHz e) [ 44708.645] (II) modesetting(0): EDID for output DVI-0 [ 44708.645] (II) modesetting(0): Output VGA-0 connected [ 44708.645] (II) modesetting(0): Output DVI-0 disconnected [ 44708.645] (II) modesetting(0): Using user preference for initial modes [ 44708.645] (II) modesetting(0): Output VGA-0 using initial mode 1280x1024 [ 44708.645] (II) modesetting(0): Using default gamma of (1.0, 1.0, 1.0) unless otherwise stated. [ 44708.645] (==) modesetting(0): DPI set to (96, 96) [ 44708.645] (II) Loading sub module "fb" [ 44708.645] (II) LoadModule: "fb" [ 44708.645] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/libfb.so [ 44708.645] (II) Module fb: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 44708.645] compiled for 1.15.1, module version = 1.0.0 [ 44708.645] ABI class: X.Org ANSI C Emulation, version 0.4 [ 44708.645] (II) Loading sub module "shadow" [ 44708.645] (II) LoadModule: "shadow" [ 44708.646] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/libshadow.so [ 44708.646] (II) Module shadow: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 44708.646] compiled for 1.15.1, module version = 1.1.0 [ 44708.646] ABI class: X.Org ANSI C Emulation, version 0.4 [ 44708.646] (**) modesetting(G0): Depth 16, (--) framebuffer bpp 16 [ 44708.646] (==) modesetting(G0): RGB weight 565 [ 44708.646] (==) modesetting(G0): Default visual is TrueColor [ 44708.646] (II) modesetting(G0): ShadowFB: preferred NO, enabled NO [ 44708.727] (II) modesetting(G0): Output DVI-1-0 using monitor section DisplayLinkMonitor [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): EDID for output DVI-1-0 [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): Manufacturer: WDE Model: 1702 Serial#: 0 [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): Year: 2005 Week: 14 [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): EDID Version: 1.3 [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): Analog Display Input, Input Voltage Level: 0.700/0.700 V [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): Sync: Separate [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): Max Image Size [cm]: horiz.: 34 vert.: 27 [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): Gamma: 2.20 [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): DPMS capabilities: StandBy Suspend Off; RGB/Color Display [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): Default color space is primary color space [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): First detailed timing is preferred mode [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): GTF timings supported [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): redX: 0.643 redY: 0.352 greenX: 0.283 greenY: 0.608 [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): blueX: 0.147 blueY: 0.102 whiteX: 0.313 whiteY: 0.329 [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): Supported established timings: [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): 720x400@70Hz [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): 640x480@60Hz [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): 640x480@67Hz [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): 640x480@72Hz [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): 640x480@75Hz [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): 800x600@56Hz [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): 800x600@60Hz [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): 800x600@72Hz [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): 800x600@75Hz [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): 832x624@75Hz [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): 1024x768@60Hz [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): 1024x768@70Hz [ 44708.808] (II) modesetting(G0): 1024x768@75Hz [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): 1280x1024@75Hz [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): Manufacturer's mask: 0 [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): Supported standard timings: [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): #0: hsize: 1280 vsize 1024 refresh: 60 vid: 32897 [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): #1: hsize: 1152 vsize 864 refresh: 75 vid: 20337 [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): Supported detailed timing: [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): clock: 108.0 MHz Image Size: 338 x 270 mm [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): h_active: 1280 h_sync: 1328 h_sync_end 1440 h_blank_end 1688 h_border: 0 [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): v_active: 1024 v_sync: 1025 v_sync_end 1028 v_blanking: 1066 v_border: 0 [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): Ranges: V min: 50 V max: 75 Hz, H min: 30 H max: 82 kHz, PixClock max 145 MHz [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): Monitor name: WDE LCM-17v2 [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): Serial No: 0 [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): EDID (in hex): [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): 00ffffffffffff005c85021700000000 [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): 0e0f010368221b78ef8bc5a45a489b25 [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): 1a5054bfef008180714f010101010101 [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): 010101010101302a009851002a403070 [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): 1300520e1100001e000000fd00324b1e [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): 520e000a202020202020000000fc0057 [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): 4445204c434d2d313776320a000000ff [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): 00300a202020202020202020202000e7 [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): Printing probed modes for output DVI-1-0 [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "1280x1024"x60.0 108.00 1280 1328 1440 1688 1024 1025 1028 1066 +hsync +vsync (64.0 kHz UeP) [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "1280x1024"x75.0 135.00 1280 1296 1440 1688 1024 1025 1028 1066 +hsync +vsync (80.0 kHz e) [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "1280x960"x60.0 108.00 1280 1376 1488 1800 960 961 964 1000 +hsync +vsync (60.0 kHz e) [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "1280x800"x74.9 106.50 1280 1360 1488 1696 800 803 809 838 -hsync +vsync (62.8 kHz e) [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "1280x800"x59.8 83.50 1280 1352 1480 1680 800 803 809 831 +hsync -vsync (49.7 kHz e) [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "1152x864"x75.0 108.00 1152 1216 1344 1600 864 865 868 900 +hsync +vsync (67.5 kHz e) [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "1280x768"x74.9 102.25 1280 1360 1488 1696 768 771 778 805 +hsync -vsync (60.3 kHz e) [ 44708.809] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "1280x768"x59.9 79.50 1280 1344 1472 1664 768 771 778 798 -hsync +vsync (47.8 kHz e) [ 44708.810] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "1024x768"x75.1 78.80 1024 1040 1136 1312 768 769 772 800 +hsync +vsync (60.1 kHz e) [ 44708.810] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "1024x768"x70.1 75.00 1024 1048 1184 1328 768 771 777 806 -hsync -vsync (56.5 kHz e) [ 44708.810] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "1024x768"x60.0 65.00 1024 1048 1184 1344 768 771 777 806 -hsync -vsync (48.4 kHz e) [ 44708.810] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "1024x576"x60.0 46.97 1024 1064 1168 1312 576 577 580 597 -hsync +vsync (35.8 kHz) [ 44708.810] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "832x624"x74.6 57.28 832 864 928 1152 624 625 628 667 -hsync -vsync (49.7 kHz e) [ 44708.810] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "800x600"x72.2 50.00 800 856 976 1040 600 637 643 666 +hsync +vsync (48.1 kHz e) [ 44708.810] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "800x600"x75.0 49.50 800 816 896 1056 600 601 604 625 +hsync +vsync (46.9 kHz e) [ 44708.810] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "800x600"x60.3 40.00 800 840 968 1056 600 601 605 628 +hsync +vsync (37.9 kHz e) [ 44708.810] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "800x600"x56.2 36.00 800 824 896 1024 600 601 603 625 +hsync +vsync (35.2 kHz e) [ 44708.810] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "848x480"x60.0 33.75 848 864 976 1088 480 486 494 517 +hsync +vsync (31.0 kHz e) [ 44708.810] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "640x480"x75.0 31.50 640 656 720 840 480 481 484 500 -hsync -vsync (37.5 kHz e) [ 44708.810] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "640x480"x72.8 31.50 640 664 704 832 480 489 491 520 -hsync -vsync (37.9 kHz e) [ 44708.810] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "640x480"x66.7 30.24 640 704 768 864 480 483 486 525 -hsync -vsync (35.0 kHz e) [ 44708.810] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "640x480"x60.0 25.20 640 656 752 800 480 490 492 525 -hsync -vsync (31.5 kHz e) [ 44708.810] (II) modesetting(G0): Modeline "720x400"x70.1 28.32 720 738 846 900 400 412 414 449 -hsync +vsync (31.5 kHz e) [ 44708.810] (II) modesetting(G0): Using default gamma of (1.0, 1.0, 1.0) unless otherwise stated. [ 44708.810] (==) modesetting(G0): DPI set to (96, 96) [ 44708.810] (II) Loading sub module "fb" [ 44708.810] (II) LoadModule: "fb" [ 44708.810] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/libfb.so [ 44708.810] (II) Module fb: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 44708.810] compiled for 1.15.1, module version = 1.0.0 [ 44708.811] ABI class: X.Org ANSI C Emulation, version 0.4 [ 44708.811] (II) UnloadModule: "radeon" [ 44708.811] (II) Unloading radeon [ 44708.811] (II) UnloadModule: "fbdev" [ 44708.811] (II) Unloading fbdev [ 44708.811] (II) UnloadSubModule: "fbdevhw" [ 44708.811] (II) Unloading fbdevhw [ 44708.811] (II) UnloadModule: "vesa" [ 44708.811] (II) Unloading vesa [ 44708.811] (==) modesetting(G0): Backing store enabled [ 44708.811] (==) modesetting(G0): Silken mouse enabled [ 44708.812] (II) modesetting(G0): RandR 1.2 enabled, ignore the following RandR disabled message. [ 44708.812] (==) modesetting(G0): DPMS enabled [ 44708.812] (WW) modesetting(G0): Option "fbdev" is not used [ 44708.812] (==) modesetting(0): Backing store enabled [ 44708.812] (==) modesetting(0): Silken mouse enabled [ 44708.812] (II) modesetting(0): RandR 1.2 enabled, ignore the following RandR disabled message. [ 44708.812] (==) modesetting(0): DPMS enabled [ 44708.812] (WW) modesetting(0): Option "fbdev" is not used [ 44708.856] (--) RandR disabled [ 44708.867] (II) SELinux: Disabled on system [ 44708.868] (II) AIGLX: Screen 0 is not DRI2 capable [ 44708.868] (EE) AIGLX: reverting to software rendering [ 44708.878] (II) AIGLX: Loaded and initialized swrast [ 44708.878] (II) GLX: Initialized DRISWRAST GL provider for screen 0 [ 44708.879] (II) modesetting(G0): Damage tracking initialized [ 44708.879] (II) modesetting(0): Damage tracking initialized [ 44708.879] (II) modesetting(0): Setting screen physical size to 338 x 270 [ 44708.900] (II) XKB: generating xkmfile /tmp/server-B20D7FC79C7F597315E3E501AEF10E0D866E8E92.xkm [ 44708.918] (II) config/udev: Adding input device Power Button (/dev/input/event1) [ 44708.918] (**) Power Button: Applying InputClass "evdev keyboard catchall" [ 44708.918] (II) LoadModule: "evdev" [ 44708.918] (II) Loading /usr/lib/xorg/modules/input/evdev_drv.so [ 44708.918] (II) Module evdev: vendor="X.Org Foundation" [ 44708.918] compiled for 1.15.0, module version = 2.8.2 [ 44708.918] Module class: X.Org XInput Driver [ 44708.918] ABI class: X.Org XInput driver, version 20.0 [ 44708.918] (II) Using input driver 'evdev' for 'Power Button' [ 44708.918] (**) Power Button: always reports core events [ 44708.918] (**) evdev: Power Button: Device: "/dev/input/event1" [ 44708.918] (--) evdev: Power Button: Vendor 0 Product 0x1 [ 44708.918] (--) evdev: Power Button: Found keys [ 44708.918] (II) evdev: Power Button: Configuring as keyboard [ 44708.918] (**) Option "config_info" "udev:/sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXPWRBN:00/input/input1/event1" [ 44708.918] (II) XINPUT: Adding extended input device "Power Button" (type: KEYBOARD, id 6) [ 44708.918] (**) Option "xkb_rules" "evdev" [ 44708.918] (**) Option "xkb_model" "pc105" [ 44708.918] (**) Option "xkb_layout" "us" [ 44708.919] (II) config/udev: Adding input device Power Button (/dev/input/event0) [ 44708.919] (**) Power Button: Applying InputClass "evdev keyboard catchall" [ 44708.919] (II) Using input driver 'evdev' for 'Power Button' [ 44708.919] (**) Power Button: always reports core events [ 44708.919] (**) evdev: Power Button: Device: "/dev/input/event0" [ 44708.919] (--) evdev: Power Button: Vendor 0 Product 0x1 [ 44708.919] (--) evdev: Power Button: Found keys [ 44708.919] (II) evdev: Power Button: Configuring as keyboard [ 44708.919] (**) Option "config_info" "udev:/sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/device:00/PNP0C0C:00/input/input0/event0" Is there anything I can do to fix this problem.

    Read the article

  • Does anyone really understand how HFSC scheduling in Linux/BSD works?

    - by Mecki
    I read the original SIGCOMM '97 PostScript paper about HFSC, it is very technically, but I understand the basic concept. Instead of giving a linear service curve (as with pretty much every other scheduling algorithm), you can specify a convex or concave service curve and thus it is possible to decouple bandwidth and delay. However, even though this paper mentions to kind of scheduling algorithms being used (real-time and link-share), it always only mentions ONE curve per scheduling class (the decoupling is done by specifying this curve, only one curve is needed for that). Now HFSC has been implemented for BSD (OpenBSD, FreeBSD, etc.) using the ALTQ scheduling framework and it has been implemented Linux using the TC scheduling framework (part of iproute2). Both implementations added two additional service curves, that were NOT in the original paper! A real-time service curve and an upper-limit service curve. Again, please note that the original paper mentions two scheduling algorithms (real-time and link-share), but in that paper both work with one single service curve. There never have been two independent service curves for either one as you currently find in BSD and Linux. Even worse, some version of ALTQ seems to add an additional queue priority to HSFC (there is no such thing as priority in the original paper either). I found several BSD HowTo's mentioning this priority setting (even though the man page of the latest ALTQ release knows no such parameter for HSFC, so officially it does not even exist). This all makes the HFSC scheduling even more complex than the algorithm described in the original paper and there are tons of tutorials on the Internet that often contradict each other, one claiming the opposite of the other one. This is probably the main reason why nobody really seems to understand how HFSC scheduling really works. Before I can ask my questions, we need a sample setup of some kind. I'll use a very simple one as seen in the image below: Here are some questions I cannot answer because the tutorials contradict each other: What for do I need a real-time curve at all? Assuming A1, A2, B1, B2 are all 128 kbit/s link-share (no real-time curve for either one), then each of those will get 128 kbit/s if the root has 512 kbit/s to distribute (and A and B are both 256 kbit/s of course), right? Why would I additionally give A1 and B1 a real-time curve with 128 kbit/s? What would this be good for? To give those two a higher priority? According to original paper I can give them a higher priority by using a curve, that's what HFSC is all about after all. By giving both classes a curve of [256kbit/s 20ms 128kbit/s] both have twice the priority than A2 and B2 automatically (still only getting 128 kbit/s on average) Does the real-time bandwidth count towards the link-share bandwidth? E.g. if A1 and B1 both only have 64kbit/s real-time and 64kbit/s link-share bandwidth, does that mean once they are served 64kbit/s via real-time, their link-share requirement is satisfied as well (they might get excess bandwidth, but lets ignore that for a second) or does that mean they get another 64 kbit/s via link-share? So does each class has a bandwidth "requirement" of real-time plus link-share? Or does a class only have a higher requirement than the real-time curve if the link-share curve is higher than the real-time curve (current link-share requirement equals specified link-share requirement minus real-time bandwidth already provided to this class)? Is upper limit curve applied to real-time as well, only to link-share, or maybe to both? Some tutorials say one way, some say the other way. Some even claim upper-limit is the maximum for real-time bandwidth + link-share bandwidth? What is the truth? Assuming A2 and B2 are both 128 kbit/s, does it make any difference if A1 and B1 are 128 kbit/s link-share only, or 64 kbit/s real-time and 128 kbit/s link-share, and if so, what difference? If I use the seperate real-time curve to increase priorities of classes, why would I need "curves" at all? Why is not real-time a flat value and link-share also a flat value? Why are both curves? The need for curves is clear in the original paper, because there is only one attribute of that kind per class. But now, having three attributes (real-time, link-share, and upper-limit) what for do I still need curves on each one? Why would I want the curves shape (not average bandwidth, but their slopes) to be different for real-time and link-share traffic? According to the little documentation available, real-time curve values are totally ignored for inner classes (class A and B), they are only applied to leaf classes (A1, A2, B1, B2). If that is true, why does the ALTQ HFSC sample configuration (search for 3.3 Sample configuration) set real-time curves on inner classes and claims that those set the guaranteed rate of those inner classes? Isn't that completely pointless? (note: pshare sets the link-share curve in ALTQ and grate the real-time curve; you can see this in the paragraph above the sample configuration). Some tutorials say the sum of all real-time curves may not be higher than 80% of the line speed, others say it must not be higher than 70% of the line speed. Which one is right or are they maybe both wrong? One tutorial said you shall forget all the theory. No matter how things really work (schedulers and bandwidth distribution), imagine the three curves according to the following "simplified mind model": real-time is the guaranteed bandwidth that this class will always get. link-share is the bandwidth that this class wants to become fully satisfied, but satisfaction cannot be guaranteed. In case there is excess bandwidth, the class might even get offered more bandwidth than necessary to become satisfied, but it may never use more than upper-limit says. For all this to work, the sum of all real-time bandwidths may not be above xx% of the line speed (see question above, the percentage varies). Question: Is this more or less accurate or a total misunderstanding of HSFC? And if assumption above is really accurate, where is prioritization in that model? E.g. every class might have a real-time bandwidth (guaranteed), a link-share bandwidth (not guaranteed) and an maybe an upper-limit, but still some classes have higher priority needs than other classes. In that case I must still prioritize somehow, even among real-time traffic of those classes. Would I prioritize by the slope of the curves? And if so, which curve? The real-time curve? The link-share curve? The upper-limit curve? All of them? Would I give all of them the same slope or each a different one and how to find out the right slope? I still haven't lost hope that there exists at least a hand full of people in this world that really understood HFSC and are able to answer all these questions accurately. And doing so without contradicting each other in the answers would be really nice ;-)

    Read the article

  • Much Ado About Nothing: Stub Objects

    - by user9154181
    The Solaris 11 link-editor (ld) contains support for a new type of object that we call a stub object. A stub object is a shared object, built entirely from mapfiles, that supplies the same linking interface as the real object, while containing no code or data. Stub objects cannot be executed — the runtime linker will kill any process that attempts to load one. However, you can link to a stub object as a dependency, allowing the stub to act as a proxy for the real version of the object. You may well wonder if there is a point to producing an object that contains nothing but linking interface. As it turns out, stub objects are very useful for building large bodies of code such as Solaris. In the last year, we've had considerable success in applying them to one of our oldest and thorniest build problems. In this discussion, I will describe how we came to invent these objects, and how we apply them to building Solaris. This posting explains where the idea for stub objects came from, and details our long and twisty journey from hallway idea to standard link-editor feature. I expect that these details are mainly of interest to those who work on Solaris and its makefiles, those who have done so in the past, and those who work with other similar bodies of code. A subsequent posting will omit the history and background details, and instead discuss how to build and use stub objects. If you are mainly interested in what stub objects are, and don't care about the underlying software war stories, I encourage you to skip ahead. The Long Road To Stubs This all started for me with an email discussion in May of 2008, regarding a change request that was filed in 2002, entitled: 4631488 lib/Makefile is too patient: .WAITs should be reduced This CR encapsulates a number of cronic issues with Solaris builds: We build Solaris with a parallel make (dmake) that tries to build as much of the code base in parallel as possible. There is a lot of code to build, and we've long made use of parallelized builds to get the job done quicker. This is even more important in today's world of massively multicore hardware. Solaris contains a large number of executables and shared objects. Executables depend on shared objects, and shared objects can depend on each other. Before you can build an object, you need to ensure that the objects it needs have been built. This implies a need for serialization, which is in direct opposition to the desire to build everying in parallel. To accurately build objects in the right order requires an accurate set of make rules defining the things that depend on each other. This sounds simple, but the reality is quite complex. In practice, having programmers explicitly specify these dependencies is a losing strategy: It's really hard to get right. It's really easy to get it wrong and never know it because things build anyway. Even if you get it right, it won't stay that way, because dependencies between objects can change over time, and make cannot help you detect such drifing. You won't know that you got it wrong until the builds break. That can be a long time after the change that triggered the breakage happened, making it hard to connect the cause and the effect. Usually this happens just before a release, when the pressure is on, its hard to think calmly, and there is no time for deep fixes. As a poor compromise, the libraries in core Solaris were built using a set of grossly incomplete hand written rules, supplemented with a number of dmake .WAIT directives used to group the libraries into sets of non-interacting groups that can be built in parallel because we think they don't depend on each other. From time to time, someone will suggest that we could analyze the built objects themselves to determine their dependencies and then generate make rules based on those relationships. This is possible, but but there are complications that limit the usefulness of that approach: To analyze an object, you have to build it first. This is a classic chicken and egg scenario. You could analyze the results of a previous build, but then you're not necessarily going to get accurate rules for the current code. It should be possible to build the code without having a built workspace available. The analysis will take time, and remember that we're constantly trying to make builds faster, not slower. By definition, such an approach will always be approximate, and therefore only incremantally more accurate than the hand written rules described above. The hand written rules are fast and cheap, while this idea is slow and complex, so we stayed with the hand written approach. Solaris was built that way, essentially forever, because these are genuinely difficult problems that had no easy answer. The makefiles were full of build races in which the right outcomes happened reliably for years until a new machine or a change in build server workload upset the accidental balance of things. After figuring out what had happened, you'd mutter "How did that ever work?", add another incomplete and soon to be inaccurate make dependency rule to the system, and move on. This was not a satisfying solution, as we tend to be perfectionists in the Solaris group, but we didn't have a better answer. It worked well enough, approximately. And so it went for years. We needed a different approach — a new idea to cut the Gordian Knot. In that discussion from May 2008, my fellow linker-alien Rod Evans had the initial spark that lead us to a game changing series of realizations: The link-editor is used to link objects together, but it only uses the ELF metadata in the object, consisting of symbol tables, ELF versioning sections, and similar data. Notably, it does not look at, or understand, the machine code that makes an object useful at runtime. If you had an object that only contained the ELF metadata for a dependency, but not the code or data, the link-editor would find it equally useful for linking, and would never know the difference. Call it a stub object. In the core Solaris OS, we require all objects to be built with a link-editor mapfile that describes all of its publically available functions and data. Could we build a stub object using the mapfile for the real object? It ought to be very fast to build stub objects, as there are no input objects to process. Unlike the real object, stub objects would not actually require any dependencies, and so, all of the stubs for the entire system could be built in parallel. When building the real objects, one could link against the stub objects instead of the real dependencies. This means that all the real objects can be built built in parallel too, without any serialization. We could replace a system that requires perfect makefile rules with a system that requires no ordering rules whatsoever. The results would be considerably more robust. We immediately realized that this idea had potential, but also that there were many details to sort out, lots of work to do, and that perhaps it wouldn't really pan out. As is often the case, it would be necessary to do the work and see how it turned out. Following that conversation, I set about trying to build a stub object. We determined that a faithful stub has to do the following: Present the same set of global symbols, with the same ELF versioning, as the real object. Functions are simple — it suffices to have a symbol of the right type, possibly, but not necessarily, referencing a null function in its text segment. Copy relocations make data more complicated to stub. The possibility of a copy relocation means that when you create a stub, the data symbols must have the actual size of the real data. Any error in this will go uncaught at link time, and will cause tragic failures at runtime that are very hard to diagnose. For reasons too obscure to go into here, involving tentative symbols, it is also important that the data reside in bss, or not, matching its placement in the real object. If the real object has more than one symbol pointing at the same data item, we call these aliased symbols. All data symbols in the stub object must exhibit the same aliasing as the real object. We imagined the stub library feature working as follows: A command line option to ld tells it to produce a stub rather than a real object. In this mode, only mapfiles are examined, and any object or shared libraries on the command line are are ignored. The extra information needed (function or data, size, and bss details) would be added to the mapfile. When building the real object instead of the stub, the extra information for building stubs would be validated against the resulting object to ensure that they match. In exploring these ideas, I immediately run headfirst into the reality of the original mapfile syntax, a subject that I would later write about as The Problem(s) With Solaris SVR4 Link-Editor Mapfiles. The idea of extending that poor language was a non-starter. Until a better mapfile syntax became available, which seemed unlikely in 2008, the solution could not involve extentions to the mapfile syntax. Instead, we cooked up the idea (hack) of augmenting mapfiles with stylized comments that would carry the necessary information. A typical definition might look like: # DATA(i386) __iob 0x3c0 # DATA(amd64,sparcv9) __iob 0xa00 # DATA(sparc) __iob 0x140 iob; A further problem then became clear: If we can't extend the mapfile syntax, then there's no good way to extend ld with an option to produce stub objects, and to validate them against the real objects. The idea of having ld read comments in a mapfile and parse them for content is an unacceptable hack. The entire point of comments is that they are strictly for the human reader, and explicitly ignored by the tool. Taking all of these speed bumps into account, I made a new plan: A perl script reads the mapfiles, generates some small C glue code to produce empty functions and data definitions, compiles and links the stub object from the generated glue code, and then deletes the generated glue code. Another perl script used after both objects have been built, to compare the real and stub objects, using data from elfdump, and validate that they present the same linking interface. By June 2008, I had written the above, and generated a stub object for libc. It was a useful prototype process to go through, and it allowed me to explore the ideas at a deep level. Ultimately though, the result was unsatisfactory as a basis for real product. There were so many issues: The use of stylized comments were fine for a prototype, but not close to professional enough for shipping product. The idea of having to document and support it was a large concern. The ideal solution for stub objects really does involve having the link-editor accept the same arguments used to build the real object, augmented with a single extra command line option. Any other solution, such as our prototype script, will require makefiles to be modified in deeper ways to support building stubs, and so, will raise barriers to converting existing code. A validation script that rederives what the linker knew when it built an object will always be at a disadvantage relative to the actual linker that did the work. A stub object should be identifyable as such. In the prototype, there was no tag or other metadata that would let you know that they weren't real objects. Being able to identify a stub object in this way means that the file command can tell you what it is, and that the runtime linker can refuse to try and run a program that loads one. At that point, we needed to apply this prototype to building Solaris. As you might imagine, the task of modifying all the makefiles in the core Solaris code base in order to do this is a massive task, and not something you'd enter into lightly. The quality of the prototype just wasn't good enough to justify that sort of time commitment, so I tabled the project, putting it on my list of long term things to think about, and moved on to other work. It would sit there for a couple of years. Semi-coincidentally, one of the projects I tacked after that was to create a new mapfile syntax for the Solaris link-editor. We had wanted to do something about the old mapfile syntax for many years. Others before me had done some paper designs, and a great deal of thought had already gone into the features it should, and should not have, but for various reasons things had never moved beyond the idea stage. When I joined Sun in late 2005, I got involved in reviewing those things and thinking about the problem. Now in 2008, fresh from relearning for the Nth time why the old mapfile syntax was a huge impediment to linker progress, it seemed like the right time to tackle the mapfile issue. Paving the way for proper stub object support was not the driving force behind that effort, but I certainly had them in mind as I moved forward. The new mapfile syntax, which we call version 2, integrated into Nevada build snv_135 in in February 2010: 6916788 ld version 2 mapfile syntax PSARC/2009/688 Human readable and extensible ld mapfile syntax In order to prove that the new mapfile syntax was adequate for general purpose use, I had also done an overhaul of the ON consolidation to convert all mapfiles to use the new syntax, and put checks in place that would ensure that no use of the old syntax would creep back in. That work went back into snv_144 in June 2010: 6916796 OSnet mapfiles should use version 2 link-editor syntax That was a big putback, modifying 517 files, adding 18 new files, and removing 110 old ones. I would have done this putback anyway, as the work was already done, and the benefits of human readable syntax are obvious. However, among the justifications listed in CR 6916796 was this We anticipate adding additional features to the new mapfile language that will be applicable to ON, and which will require all sharable object mapfiles to use the new syntax. I never explained what those additional features were, and no one asked. It was premature to say so, but this was a reference to stub objects. By that point, I had already put together a working prototype link-editor with the necessary support for stub objects. I was pleased to find that building stubs was indeed very fast. On my desktop system (Ultra 24), an amd64 stub for libc can can be built in a fraction of a second: % ptime ld -64 -z stub -o stubs/libc.so.1 -G -hlibc.so.1 \ -ztext -zdefs -Bdirect ... real 0.019708910 user 0.010101680 sys 0.008528431 In order to go from prototype to integrated link-editor feature, I knew that I would need to prove that stub objects were valuable. And to do that, I knew that I'd have to switch the Solaris ON consolidation to use stub objects and evaluate the outcome. And in order to do that experiment, ON would first need to be converted to version 2 mapfiles. Sub-mission accomplished. Normally when you design a new feature, you can devise reasonably small tests to show it works, and then deploy it incrementally, letting it prove its value as it goes. The entire point of stub objects however was to demonstrate that they could be successfully applied to an extremely large and complex code base, and specifically to solve the Solaris build issues detailed above. There was no way to finesse the matter — in order to move ahead, I would have to successfully use stub objects to build the entire ON consolidation and demonstrate their value. In software, the need to boil the ocean can often be a warning sign that things are trending in the wrong direction. Conversely, sometimes progress demands that you build something large and new all at once. A big win, or a big loss — sometimes all you can do is try it and see what happens. And so, I spent some time staring at ON makefiles trying to get a handle on how things work, and how they'd have to change. It's a big and messy world, full of complex interactions, unspecified dependencies, special cases, and knowledge of arcane makefile features... ...and so, I backed away, put it down for a few months and did other work... ...until the fall, when I felt like it was time to stop thinking and pondering (some would say stalling) and get on with it. Without stubs, the following gives a simplified high level view of how Solaris is built: An initially empty directory known as the proto, and referenced via the ROOT makefile macro is established to receive the files that make up the Solaris distribution. A top level setup rule creates the proto area, and performs operations needed to initialize the workspace so that the main build operations can be launched, such as copying needed header files into the proto area. Parallel builds are launched to build the kernel (usr/src/uts), libraries (usr/src/lib), and commands. The install makefile target builds each item and delivers a copy to the proto area. All libraries and executables link against the objects previously installed in the proto, implying the need to synchronize the order in which things are built. Subsequent passes run lint, and do packaging. Given this structure, the additions to use stub objects are: A new second proto area is established, known as the stub proto and referenced via the STUBROOT makefile macro. The stub proto has the same structure as the real proto, but is used to hold stub objects. All files in the real proto are delivered as part of the Solaris product. In contrast, the stub proto is used to build the product, and then thrown away. A new target is added to library Makefiles called stub. This rule builds the stub objects. The ld command is designed so that you can build a stub object using the same ld command line you'd use to build the real object, with the addition of a single -z stub option. This means that the makefile rules for building the stub objects are very similar to those used to build the real objects, and many existing makefile definitions can be shared between them. A new target is added to the Makefiles called stubinstall which delivers the stub objects built by the stub rule into the stub proto. These rules reuse much of existing plumbing used by the existing install rule. The setup rule runs stubinstall over the entire lib subtree as part of its initialization. All libraries and executables link against the objects in the stub proto rather than the main proto, and can therefore be built in parallel without any synchronization. There was no small way to try this that would yield meaningful results. I would have to take a leap of faith and edit approximately 1850 makefiles and 300 mapfiles first, trusting that it would all work out. Once the editing was done, I'd type make and see what happened. This took about 6 weeks to do, and there were many dark days when I'd question the entire project, or struggle to understand some of the many twisted and complex situations I'd uncover in the makefiles. I even found a couple of new issues that required changes to the new stub object related code I'd added to ld. With a substantial amount of encouragement and help from some key people in the Solaris group, I eventually got the editing done and stub objects for the entire workspace built. I found that my desktop system could build all the stub objects in the workspace in roughly a minute. This was great news, as it meant that use of the feature is effectively free — no one was likely to notice or care about the cost of building them. After another week of typing make, fixing whatever failed, and doing it again, I succeeded in getting a complete build! The next step was to remove all of the make rules and .WAIT statements dedicated to controlling the order in which libraries under usr/src/lib are built. This came together pretty quickly, and after a few more speed bumps, I had a workspace that built cleanly and looked like something you might actually be able to integrate someday. This was a significant milestone, but there was still much left to do. I turned to doing full nightly builds. Every type of build (open, closed, OpenSolaris, export, domestic) had to be tried. Each type failed in a new and unique way, requiring some thinking and rework. As things came together, I became aware of things that could have been done better, simpler, or cleaner, and those things also required some rethinking, the seeking of wisdom from others, and some rework. After another couple of weeks, it was in close to final form. My focus turned towards the end game and integration. This was a huge workspace, and needed to go back soon, before changes in the gate would made merging increasingly difficult. At this point, I knew that the stub objects had greatly simplified the makefile logic and uncovered a number of race conditions, some of which had been there for years. I assumed that the builds were faster too, so I did some builds intended to quantify the speedup in build time that resulted from this approach. It had never occurred to me that there might not be one. And so, I was very surprised to find that the wall clock build times for a stock ON workspace were essentially identical to the times for my stub library enabled version! This is why it is important to always measure, and not just to assume. One can tell from first principles, based on all those removed dependency rules in the library makefile, that the stub object version of ON gives dmake considerably more opportunities to overlap library construction. Some hypothesis were proposed, and shot down: Could we have disabled dmakes parallel feature? No, a quick check showed things being build in parallel. It was suggested that we might be I/O bound, and so, the threads would be mostly idle. That's a plausible explanation, but system stats didn't really support it. Plus, the timing between the stub and non-stub cases were just too suspiciously identical. Are our machines already handling as much parallelism as they are capable of, and unable to exploit these additional opportunities? Once again, we didn't see the evidence to back this up. Eventually, a more plausible and obvious reason emerged: We build the libraries and commands (usr/src/lib, usr/src/cmd) in parallel with the kernel (usr/src/uts). The kernel is the long leg in that race, and so, wall clock measurements of build time are essentially showing how long it takes to build uts. Although it would have been nice to post a huge speedup immediately, we can take solace in knowing that stub objects simplify the makefiles and reduce the possibility of race conditions. The next step in reducing build time should be to find ways to reduce or overlap the uts part of the builds. When that leg of the build becomes shorter, then the increased parallelism in the libs and commands will pay additional dividends. Until then, we'll just have to settle for simpler and more robust. And so, I integrated the link-editor support for creating stub objects into snv_153 (November 2010) with 6993877 ld should produce stub objects PSARC/2010/397 ELF Stub Objects followed by the work to convert the ON consolidation in snv_161 (February 2011) with 7009826 OSnet should use stub objects 4631488 lib/Makefile is too patient: .WAITs should be reduced This was a huge putback, with 2108 modified files, 8 new files, and 2 removed files. Due to the size, I was allowed a window after snv_160 closed in which to do the putback. It went pretty smoothly for something this big, a few more preexisting race conditions would be discovered and addressed over the next few weeks, and things have been quiet since then. Conclusions and Looking Forward Solaris has been built with stub objects since February. The fact that developers no longer specify the order in which libraries are built has been a big success, and we've eliminated an entire class of build error. That's not to say that there are no build races left in the ON makefiles, but we've taken a substantial bite out of the problem while generally simplifying and improving things. The introduction of a stub proto area has also opened some interesting new possibilities for other build improvements. As this article has become quite long, and as those uses do not involve stub objects, I will defer that discussion to a future article.

    Read the article

  • Overview of SOA Diagnostics in 11.1.1.6

    - by ShawnBailey
    What tools are available for diagnosing SOA Suite issues? There are a variety of tools available to help you and Support diagnose SOA Suite issues in 11g but it can be confusing as to which tool is appropriate for a particular situation and what their relationships are. This blog post will introduce the various tools and attempt to clarify what each is for and how they are related. Let's first list the tools we'll be addressing: RDA: Remote Diagnostic Agent DFW: Diagnostic Framework Selective Tracing DMS: Dynamic Monitoring Service ODL: Oracle Diagnostic Logging ADR: Automatic Diagnostics Repository ADRCI: Automatic Diagnostics Repository Command Interpreter WLDF: WebLogic Diagnostic Framework This overview is not mean to be a comprehensive guide on using all of these tools, however, extensive reference materials are included that will provide many more details on their execution. Another point to note is that all of these tools are applicable for Fusion Middleware as a whole but specific products may or may not have implemented features to leverage them. A couple of the tools have a WebLogic Scripting Tool or 'WLST' interface. WLST is a command interface for executing pre-built functions and custom scripts against a domain. A detailed WLST tutorial is beyond the scope of this post but you can find general information here. There are more specific resources in the below sections. In this post when we refer to 'Enterprise Manager' or 'EM' we are referring to Enterprise Manager Fusion Middleware Control. RDA (Remote Diagnostic Agent) RDA is a standalone tool that is used to collect both static configuration and dynamic runtime information from the SOA environment. RDA is generally run manually from the command line against a domain or single server. When opening a new Service Request, including an RDA collection can dramatically decrease the back and forth required to collect logs and configuration information for Support. After installing RDA you configure it to use the SOA Suite module as decribed in the referenced resources. The SOA module includes the Oracle WebLogic Server (WLS) module by default in order to include all of the relevant information for the environment. In addition to this basic configuration there is also an advanced mode where you can set the number of thread dumps for the collections, log files, Incidents, etc. When would you use it? When creating a Service Request or otherwise working with Oracle resources on an issue, capturing environment snapshots to baseline your configuration or to diagnose an issue on your own. How is it related to the other tools? RDA is related to DFW in that it collects the last 10 Incidents from the server by default. In a similar manner, RDA is related to ODL through its collection of the diagnostic logs and these may contain information from Selective Tracing sessions. Examples of what it currently collects: (for details please see the links in the Resources section) Diagnostic Logs (ODL) Diagnostic Framework Incidents (DFW) SOA MDS Deployment Descriptors SOA Repository Summary Statistics Thread Dumps Complete Domain Configuration RDA Resources: Webcast Recording: Using RDA with Oracle SOA Suite 11g Blog Post: Diagnose SOA Suite 11g Issues Using RDA Download RDA How to Collect Analysis Information Using RDA for Oracle SOA Suite 11g Products [ID 1350313.1] How to Collect Analysis Information Using RDA for Oracle SOA Suite and BPEL Process Manager 11g [ID 1352181.1] Getting Started With Remote Diagnostic Agent: Case Study - Oracle WebLogic Server (Video) [ID 1262157.1] top DFW (Diagnostic Framework) DFW provides the ability to collect specific information for a particular problem when that problem occurs. DFW is included with your SOA Suite installation and deployed to the domain. Let's define the components of DFW. Diagnostic Dumps: Specific diagnostic collections that are defined at either the 'system' or product level. Examples would be diagnostic logs or thread dumps. Incident: A collection of Diagnostic Dumps associated with a particular problem Log Conditions: An Oracle Diagnostic Logging event that DFW is configured to listen for. If the event is identified then an Incident will be created. WLDF Watch: The WebLogic Diagnostic Framework or 'WLDF' is not a component of DFW, however, it can be a source of DFW Incident creation through the use of a 'Watch'. WLDF Notification: A Notification is a component of WLDF and is the link between the Watch and DFW. You can configure multiple Notification types in WLDF and associate them with your Watches. 'FMWDFW-notification' is available to you out of the box to allow for DFW notification of Watch execution. Rule: Defines a WLDF Watch or Log Condition for which we want to associate a set of Diagnostic Dumps. When triggered the specified dumps will be collected and added to the Incident Rule Action: Defines the specific Diagnostic Dumps to collect for a particular rule ADR: Automatic Diagnostics Repository; Defined for every server in a domain. This is where Incidents are stored Now let's walk through a simple flow: Oracle Web Services error message OWS-04086 (SOAP Fault) is generated on managed server 1 DFW Log Condition for OWS-04086 evaluates to TRUE DFW creates a new Incident in the ADR for managed server 1 DFW executes the specified Diagnostic Dumps and adds the output to the Incident In this case we'll grab the diagnostic log and thread dump. We might also want to collect the WSDL binding information and SOA audit trail When would you use it? When you want to automatically collect Diagnostic Dumps at a particular time using a trigger or when you want to manually collect the information. In either case it can be readily uploaded to Oracle Support through the Service Request. How is it related to the other tools? DFW generates Incidents which are collections of Diagnostic Dumps. One of the system level Diagonstic Dumps collects the current server diagnostic log which is generated by ODL and can contain information from Selective Tracing sessions. Incidents are included in RDA collections by default and ADRCI is a tool that is used to package an Incident for upload to Oracle Support. In addition, both ODL and DMS can be used to trigger Incident creation through DFW. The conditions and rules for generating Incidents can become quite complicated and the below resources go into more detail. A simpler approach to leveraging at least the Diagnostic Dumps is through WLST (WebLogic Scripting Tool) where there are commands to do the following: Create an Incident Execute a single Diagnostic Dump Describe a Diagnostic Dump List the available Diagnostic Dumps The WLST option offers greater control in what is generated and when. It can be a great help when collecting information for Support. There are overlaps with RDA, however, DFW is geared towards collecting specific runtime information when an issue occurs while existing Incidents are collected by RDA. There are 3 WLDF Watches configured by default in a SOA Suite 11g domain: Stuck Threads, Unchecked Exception and Deadlock. These Watches are enabled by default and will generate Incidents in ADR. They are configured to reset automatically after 30 seconds so they have the potential to create multiple Incidents if these conditions are consistent. The Incidents generated by these Watches will only contain System level Diagnostic Dumps. These same System level Diagnostic Dumps will be included in any application scoped Incident as well. Starting in 11.1.1.6, SOA Suite is including its own set of application scoped Diagnostic Dumps that can be executed from WLST or through a WLDF Watch or Log Condition. These Diagnostic Dumps can be added to an Incident such as in the earlier example using the error code OWS-04086. soa.config: MDS configuration files and deployed-composites.xml soa.composite: All artifacts related to the deployed composite soa.wsdl: Summary of endpoints configured for the composite soa.edn: EDN configuration summary if applicable soa.db: Summary DB information for the SOA repository soa.env: Coherence cluster configuration summary soa.composite.trail: Partial audit trail information for the running composite The current release of RDA has the option to collect the soa.wsdl and soa.composite Diagnostic Dumps. More Diagnostic Dumps for SOA Suite products are planned for future releases along with enhancements to DFW itself. DFW Resources: Webcast Recording: SOA Diagnostics Sessions: Diagnostic Framework Diagnostic Framework Documentation DFW WLST Command Reference Documentation for SOA Diagnostic Dumps in 11.1.1.6 top Selective Tracing Selective Tracing is a facility available starting in version 11.1.1.4 that allows you to increase the logging level for specific loggers and for a specific context. What this means is that you have greater capability to collect needed diagnostic log information in a production environment with reduced overhead. For example, a Selective Tracing session can be executed that only increases the log level for one composite, only one logger, limited to one server in the cluster and for a preset period of time. In an environment where dozens of composites are deployed this can dramatically reduce the volume and overhead of the logging without sacrificing relevance. Selective Tracing can be administered either from Enterprise Manager or through WLST. WLST provides a bit more flexibility in terms of exactly where the tracing is run. When would you use it? When there is an issue in production or another environment that lends itself to filtering by an available context criteria and increasing the log level globally results in too much overhead or irrelevant information. The information is written to the server diagnostic log and is exportable from Enterprise Manager How is it related to the other tools? Selective Tracing output is written to the server diagnostic log. This log can be collected by a system level Diagnostic Dump using DFW or through a default RDA collection. Selective Tracing also heavily leverages ODL fields to determine what to trace and to tag information that is part of a particular tracing session. Available Context Criteria: Application Name Client Address Client Host Composite Name User Name Web Service Name Web Service Port Selective Tracing Resources: Webcast Recording: SOA Diagnostics Session: Using Selective Tracing to Diagnose SOA Suite Issues How to Use Selective Tracing for SOA [ID 1367174.1] Selective Tracing WLST Reference top DMS (Dynamic Monitoring Service) DMS exposes runtime information for monitoring. This information can be monitored in two ways: Through the DMS servlet As exposed MBeans The servlet is deployed by default and can be accessed through http://<host>:<port>/dms/Spy (use administrative credentials to access). The landing page of the servlet shows identical columns of what are known as Noun Types. If you select a Noun Type you will see a table in the right frame that shows the attributes (Sensors) for the Noun Type and the available instances. SOA Suite has several exposed Noun Types that are available for viewing through the Spy servlet. Screenshots of the Spy servlet are available in the Knowledge Base article How to Monitor Runtime SOA Performance With the Dynamic Monitoring Service (DMS). Every Noun instance in the runtime is exposed as an MBean instance. As such they are generally available through an MBean browser and available for monitoring through WLDF. You can configure a WLDF Watch to monitor a particular attribute and fire a notification when the threshold is exceeded. A WLDF Watch can use the out of the box DFW notification type to notify DFW to create an Incident. When would you use it? When you want to monitor a metric or set of metrics either manually or through an automated system. When you want to trigger a WLDF Watch based on a metric exposed through DMS. How is it related to the other tools? DMS metrics can be monitored with WLDF Watches which can in turn notify DFW to create an Incident. DMS Resources: How to Monitor Runtime SOA Performance With the Dynamic Monitoring Service (DMS) [ID 1368291.1] How to Reset a SOA 11g DMS Metric DMS Documentation top ODL (Oracle Diagnostic Logging) ODL is the primary facility for most Fusion Middleware applications to log what they are doing. Whenever you change a logging level through Enterprise Manager it is ultimately exposed through ODL and written to the server diagnostic log. A notable exception to this is WebLogic Server which uses its own log format / file. ODL logs entries in a consistent, structured way using predefined fields and name/value pairs. Here's an example of a SOA Suite entry: [2012-04-25T12:49:28.083-06:00] [AdminServer] [ERROR] [] [oracle.soa.bpel.engine] [tid: [ACTIVE].ExecuteThread: '1' for queue: 'weblogic.kernel.Default (self-tuning)'] [userId: ] [ecid: 0963fdde7e77631c:-31a6431d:136eaa46cda:-8000-00000000000000b4,0] [errid: 41] [WEBSERVICE_PORT.name: BPELProcess2_pt] [APP: soa-infra] [composite_name: TestProject2] [J2EE_MODULE.name: fabric] [WEBSERVICE.name: bpelprocess1_client_ep] [J2EE_APP.name: soa-infra] Error occured while handling a post operation[[ When would you use it? You'll use ODL almost every time you want to identify and diagnose a problem in the environment. The entries are written to the server diagnostic log. How is it related to the other tools? The server diagnostic logs are collected by DFW and RDA. Selective Tracing writes its information to the diagnostic log as well. Additionally, DFW log conditions are triggered by ODL log events. ODL Resources: ODL Documentation top ADR (Automatic Diagnostics Repository) ADR is not a tool in and of itself but is where DFW stores the Incidents it creates. Every server in the domain has an ADR location which can be found under <SERVER_HOME>/adr. This is referred to the as the ADR 'Base' location. ADR also has what are known as 'Home' locations. Example: You have a domain called 'myDomain' and an associated managed server called 'myServer'. Your admin server is called 'AdminServer'. Your domain home directory is called 'myDomain' and it contains a 'servers' directory. The 'servers' directory contains a directory for the managed server called 'myServer' and here is where you'll find the 'adr' directory which is the ADR 'Base' location for myServer. To get to the ADR 'Home' locations we drill through a few levels: diag/ofm/myDomain/ In an 11.1.1.6 SOA Suite domain you will see 2 directories here, 'myServer' and 'soa-infra'. These are the ADR 'Home' locations. 'myServer' is the 'system' ADR home and contains system level Incidents. 'soa-infra' is the name that SOA Suite used to register with DFW and this ADR home contains SOA Suite related Incidents Each ADR home location contains a series of directories, one of which is called 'incident'. This is where your Incidents are stored. When would you use it? It's a good idea to check on these locations from time to time to see whether a lot of Incidents are being generated. They can be cleaned out by deleting the Incident directories or through the ADRCI tool. If you know that an Incident is of particular interest for an issue you're working with Oracle you can simply zip it up and provide it. How does it relate to the other tools? ADR is obviously very important for DFW since it's where the Incidents are stored. Incidents contain Diagnostic Dumps that may relate to diagnostic logs (ODL) and DMS metrics. The most recent 10 Incident directories are collected by RDA by default and ADRCI relies on the ADR locations to help manage the contents. top ADRCI (Automatic Diagnostics Repository Command Interpreter) ADRCI is a command line tool for packaging and managing Incidents. When would you use it? When purging Incidents from an ADR Home location or when you want to package an Incident along with an offline RDA collection for upload to Oracle Support. How does it relate to the other tools? ADRCI contains a tool called the Incident Packaging System or IPS. This is used to package an Incident for upload to Oracle Support through a Service Request. Starting in 11.1.1.6 IPS will attempt to collect an offline RDA collection and include it with the Incident package. This will only work if Perl is available on the path, otherwise it will give a warning and package only the Incident files. ADRCI Resources: How to Use the Incident Packaging System (IPS) in SOA 11g [ID 1381259.1] ADRCI Documentation top WLDF (WebLogic Diagnostic Framework) WLDF is functionality available in WebLogic Server since version 9. Starting with FMw 11g a link has been added between WLDF and the pre-existing DFW, the WLDF Watch Notification. Let's take a closer look at the flow: There is a need to monitor the performance of your SOA Suite message processing A WLDF Watch is created in the WLS console that will trigger if the average message processing time exceeds 2 seconds. This metric is monitored through a DMS MBean instance. The out of the box DFW Notification (the Notification is called FMWDFW-notification) is added to the Watch. Under the covers this notification is of type JMX. The Watch is triggered when the threshold is exceeded and fires the Notification. DFW has a listener that picks up the Notification and evaluates it according to its rules, etc When it comes to automatic Incident creation, WLDF is a key component with capabilities that will grow over time. When would you use it? When you want to monitor the WLS server log or an MBean metric for some condition and fire a notification when the Watch is triggered. How does it relate to the other tools? WLDF is used to automatically trigger Incident creation through DFW using the DFW Notification. WLDF Resources: How to Monitor Runtime SOA Performance With the Dynamic Monitoring Service (DMS) [ID 1368291.1] How To Script the Creation of a SOA WLDF Watch in 11g [ID 1377986.1] WLDF Documentation top

    Read the article

  • Developing custom MBeans to manage J2EE Applications (Part III)

    - by philippe Le Mouel
    This is the third and final part in a series of blogs, that demonstrate how to add management capability to your own application using JMX MBeans. In Part I we saw: How to implement a custom MBean to manage configuration associated with an application. How to package the resulting code and configuration as part of the application's ear file. How to register MBeans upon application startup, and unregistered them upon application stop (or undeployment). How to use generic JMX clients such as JConsole to browse and edit our application's MBean. In Part II we saw: How to add localized descriptions to our MBean, MBean attributes, MBean operations and MBean operation parameters. How to specify meaningful name to our MBean operation parameters. We also touched on future enhancements that will simplify how we can implement localized MBeans. In this third and last part, we will re-write our MBean to simplify how we added localized descriptions. To do so we will take advantage of the functionality we already described in part II and that is now part of WebLogic 10.3.3.0. We will show how to take advantage of WebLogic's localization support to localize our MBeans based on the client's Locale independently of the server's Locale. Each client will see MBean descriptions localized based on his/her own Locale. We will show how to achieve this using JConsole, and also using a sample programmatic JMX Java client. The complete code sample and associated build files for part III are available as a zip file. The code has been tested against WebLogic Server 10.3.3.0 and JDK6. To build and deploy our sample application, please follow the instruction provided in Part I, as they also apply to part III's code and associated zip file. Providing custom descriptions take II In part II we localized our MBean descriptions by extending the StandardMBean class and overriding its many getDescription methods. WebLogic 10.3.3.0 similarly to JDK 7 can automatically localize MBean descriptions as long as those are specified according to the following conventions: Descriptions resource bundle keys are named according to: MBean description: <MBeanInterfaceClass>.mbean MBean attribute description: <MBeanInterfaceClass>.attribute.<AttributeName> MBean operation description: <MBeanInterfaceClass>.operation.<OperationName> MBean operation parameter description: <MBeanInterfaceClass>.operation.<OperationName>.<ParameterName> MBean constructor description: <MBeanInterfaceClass>.constructor.<ConstructorName> MBean constructor parameter description: <MBeanInterfaceClass>.constructor.<ConstructorName>.<ParameterName> We also purposely named our resource bundle class MBeanDescriptions and included it as part of the same package as our MBean. We already followed the above conventions when creating our resource bundle in part II, and our default resource bundle class with English descriptions looks like: package blog.wls.jmx.appmbean; import java.util.ListResourceBundle; public class MBeanDescriptions extends ListResourceBundle { protected Object[][] getContents() { return new Object[][] { {"PropertyConfigMXBean.mbean", "MBean used to manage persistent application properties"}, {"PropertyConfigMXBean.attribute.Properties", "Properties associated with the running application"}, {"PropertyConfigMXBean.operation.setProperty", "Create a new property, or change the value of an existing property"}, {"PropertyConfigMXBean.operation.setProperty.key", "Name that identify the property to set."}, {"PropertyConfigMXBean.operation.setProperty.value", "Value for the property being set"}, {"PropertyConfigMXBean.operation.getProperty", "Get the value for an existing property"}, {"PropertyConfigMXBean.operation.getProperty.key", "Name that identify the property to be retrieved"} }; } } We have now also added a resource bundle with French localized descriptions: package blog.wls.jmx.appmbean; import java.util.ListResourceBundle; public class MBeanDescriptions_fr extends ListResourceBundle { protected Object[][] getContents() { return new Object[][] { {"PropertyConfigMXBean.mbean", "Manage proprietes sauvegarde dans un fichier disque."}, {"PropertyConfigMXBean.attribute.Properties", "Proprietes associee avec l'application en cour d'execution"}, {"PropertyConfigMXBean.operation.setProperty", "Construit une nouvelle proprietee, ou change la valeur d'une proprietee existante."}, {"PropertyConfigMXBean.operation.setProperty.key", "Nom de la propriete dont la valeur est change."}, {"PropertyConfigMXBean.operation.setProperty.value", "Nouvelle valeur"}, {"PropertyConfigMXBean.operation.getProperty", "Retourne la valeur d'une propriete existante."}, {"PropertyConfigMXBean.operation.getProperty.key", "Nom de la propriete a retrouver."} }; } } So now we can just remove the many getDescriptions methods from our MBean code, and have a much cleaner: package blog.wls.jmx.appmbean; import java.io.IOException; import java.io.InputStream; import java.io.OutputStream; import java.io.FileInputStream; import java.io.FileOutputStream; import java.io.File; import java.net.URL; import java.util.Map; import java.util.HashMap; import java.util.Properties; import javax.management.MBeanServer; import javax.management.ObjectName; import javax.management.MBeanRegistration; import javax.management.StandardMBean; import javax.management.MBeanOperationInfo; import javax.management.MBeanParameterInfo; public class PropertyConfig extends StandardMBean implements PropertyConfigMXBean, MBeanRegistration { private String relativePath_ = null; private Properties props_ = null; private File resource_ = null; private static Map operationsParamNames_ = null; static { operationsParamNames_ = new HashMap(); operationsParamNames_.put("setProperty", new String[] {"key", "value"}); operationsParamNames_.put("getProperty", new String[] {"key"}); } public PropertyConfig(String relativePath) throws Exception { super(PropertyConfigMXBean.class , true); props_ = new Properties(); relativePath_ = relativePath; } public String setProperty(String key, String value) throws IOException { String oldValue = null; if (value == null) { oldValue = String.class.cast(props_.remove(key)); } else { oldValue = String.class.cast(props_.setProperty(key, value)); } save(); return oldValue; } public String getProperty(String key) { return props_.getProperty(key); } public Map getProperties() { return (Map) props_; } private void load() throws IOException { InputStream is = new FileInputStream(resource_); try { props_.load(is); } finally { is.close(); } } private void save() throws IOException { OutputStream os = new FileOutputStream(resource_); try { props_.store(os, null); } finally { os.close(); } } public ObjectName preRegister(MBeanServer server, ObjectName name) throws Exception { // MBean must be registered from an application thread // to have access to the application ClassLoader ClassLoader cl = Thread.currentThread().getContextClassLoader(); URL resourceUrl = cl.getResource(relativePath_); resource_ = new File(resourceUrl.toURI()); load(); return name; } public void postRegister(Boolean registrationDone) { } public void preDeregister() throws Exception {} public void postDeregister() {} protected String getParameterName(MBeanOperationInfo op, MBeanParameterInfo param, int sequence) { return operationsParamNames_.get(op.getName())[sequence]; } } The only reason we are still extending the StandardMBean class, is to override the default values for our operations parameters name. If this isn't a concern, then one could just write the following code: package blog.wls.jmx.appmbean; import java.io.IOException; import java.io.InputStream; import java.io.OutputStream; import java.io.FileInputStream; import java.io.FileOutputStream; import java.io.File; import java.net.URL; import java.util.Properties; import javax.management.MBeanServer; import javax.management.ObjectName; import javax.management.MBeanRegistration; import javax.management.StandardMBean; import javax.management.MBeanOperationInfo; import javax.management.MBeanParameterInfo; public class PropertyConfig implements PropertyConfigMXBean, MBeanRegistration { private String relativePath_ = null; private Properties props_ = null; private File resource_ = null; public PropertyConfig(String relativePath) throws Exception { props_ = new Properties(); relativePath_ = relativePath; } public String setProperty(String key, String value) throws IOException { String oldValue = null; if (value == null) { oldValue = String.class.cast(props_.remove(key)); } else { oldValue = String.class.cast(props_.setProperty(key, value)); } save(); return oldValue; } public String getProperty(String key) { return props_.getProperty(key); } public Map getProperties() { return (Map) props_; } private void load() throws IOException { InputStream is = new FileInputStream(resource_); try { props_.load(is); } finally { is.close(); } } private void save() throws IOException { OutputStream os = new FileOutputStream(resource_); try { props_.store(os, null); } finally { os.close(); } } public ObjectName preRegister(MBeanServer server, ObjectName name) throws Exception { // MBean must be registered from an application thread // to have access to the application ClassLoader ClassLoader cl = Thread.currentThread().getContextClassLoader(); URL resourceUrl = cl.getResource(relativePath_); resource_ = new File(resourceUrl.toURI()); load(); return name; } public void postRegister(Boolean registrationDone) { } public void preDeregister() throws Exception {} public void postDeregister() {} } Note: The above would also require changing the operations parameters name in the resource bundle classes. For instance: PropertyConfigMXBean.operation.setProperty.key would become: PropertyConfigMXBean.operation.setProperty.p0 Client based localization When accessing our MBean using JConsole started with the following command line: jconsole -J-Djava.class.path=$JAVA_HOME/lib/jconsole.jar:$JAVA_HOME/lib/tools.jar: $WL_HOME/server/lib/wljmxclient.jar -J-Djmx.remote.protocol.provider.pkgs=weblogic.management.remote -debug We see that our MBean descriptions are localized according to the WebLogic's server Locale. English in this case: Note: Consult Part I for information on how to use JConsole to browse/edit our MBean. Now if we specify the client's Locale as part of the JConsole command line as follow: jconsole -J-Djava.class.path=$JAVA_HOME/lib/jconsole.jar:$JAVA_HOME/lib/tools.jar: $WL_HOME/server/lib/wljmxclient.jar -J-Djmx.remote.protocol.provider.pkgs=weblogic.management.remote -J-Dweblogic.management.remote.locale=fr-FR -debug We see that our MBean descriptions are now localized according to the specified client's Locale. French in this case: We use the weblogic.management.remote.locale system property to specify the Locale that should be associated with the cient's JMX connections. The value is composed of the client's language code and its country code separated by the - character. The country code is not required, and can be omitted. For instance: -Dweblogic.management.remote.locale=fr We can also specify the client's Locale using a programmatic client as demonstrated below: package blog.wls.jmx.appmbean.client; import javax.management.MBeanServerConnection; import javax.management.ObjectName; import javax.management.MBeanInfo; import javax.management.remote.JMXConnector; import javax.management.remote.JMXServiceURL; import javax.management.remote.JMXConnectorFactory; import java.util.Hashtable; import java.util.Set; import java.util.Locale; public class JMXClient { public static void main(String[] args) throws Exception { JMXConnector jmxCon = null; try { JMXServiceURL serviceUrl = new JMXServiceURL( "service:jmx:iiop://127.0.0.1:7001/jndi/weblogic.management.mbeanservers.runtime"); System.out.println("Connecting to: " + serviceUrl); // properties associated with the connection Hashtable env = new Hashtable(); env.put(JMXConnectorFactory.PROTOCOL_PROVIDER_PACKAGES, "weblogic.management.remote"); String[] credentials = new String[2]; credentials[0] = "weblogic"; credentials[1] = "weblogic"; env.put(JMXConnector.CREDENTIALS, credentials); // specifies the client's Locale env.put("weblogic.management.remote.locale", Locale.FRENCH); jmxCon = JMXConnectorFactory.newJMXConnector(serviceUrl, env); jmxCon.connect(); MBeanServerConnection con = jmxCon.getMBeanServerConnection(); Set mbeans = con.queryNames( new ObjectName( "blog.wls.jmx.appmbean:name=myAppProperties,type=PropertyConfig,*"), null); for (ObjectName mbeanName : mbeans) { System.out.println("\n\nMBEAN: " + mbeanName); MBeanInfo minfo = con.getMBeanInfo(mbeanName); System.out.println("MBean Description: "+minfo.getDescription()); System.out.println("\n"); } } finally { // release the connection if (jmxCon != null) jmxCon.close(); } } } The above client code is part of the zip file associated with this blog, and can be run using the provided client.sh script. The resulting output is shown below: $ ./client.sh Connecting to: service:jmx:iiop://127.0.0.1:7001/jndi/weblogic.management.mbeanservers.runtime MBEAN: blog.wls.jmx.appmbean:type=PropertyConfig,name=myAppProperties MBean Description: Manage proprietes sauvegarde dans un fichier disque. $ Miscellaneous Using Description annotation to specify MBean descriptions Earlier we have seen how to name our MBean descriptions resource keys, so that WebLogic 10.3.3.0 automatically uses them to localize our MBean. In some cases we might want to implicitly specify the resource key, and resource bundle. For instance when operations are overloaded, and the operation name is no longer sufficient to uniquely identify a single operation. In this case we can use the Description annotation provided by WebLogic as follow: import weblogic.management.utils.Description; @Description(resourceKey="myapp.resources.TestMXBean.description", resourceBundleBaseName="myapp.resources.MBeanResources") public interface TestMXBean { @Description(resourceKey="myapp.resources.TestMXBean.threshold.description", resourceBundleBaseName="myapp.resources.MBeanResources" ) public int getthreshold(); @Description(resourceKey="myapp.resources.TestMXBean.reset.description", resourceBundleBaseName="myapp.resources.MBeanResources") public int reset( @Description(resourceKey="myapp.resources.TestMXBean.reset.id.description", resourceBundleBaseName="myapp.resources.MBeanResources", displayNameKey= "myapp.resources.TestMXBean.reset.id.displayName.description") int id); } The Description annotation should be applied to the MBean interface. It can be used to specify MBean, MBean attributes, MBean operations, and MBean operation parameters descriptions as demonstrated above. Retrieving the Locale associated with a JMX operation from the MBean code There are several cases where it is necessary to retrieve the Locale associated with a JMX call from the MBean implementation. For instance this can be useful when localizing exception messages. This can be done as follow: import weblogic.management.mbeanservers.JMXContextUtil; ...... // some MBean method implementation public String setProperty(String key, String value) throws IOException { Locale callersLocale = JMXContextUtil.getLocale(); // use callersLocale to localize Exception messages or // potentially some return values such a Date .... } Conclusion With this last part we conclude our three part series on how to write MBeans to manage J2EE applications. We are far from having exhausted this particular topic, but we have gone a long way and are now capable to take advantage of the latest functionality provided by WebLogic's application server to write user friendly MBeans.

    Read the article

  • Can't connect to samba

    - by Rick
    Windows 7, connecting to Samba shares I have a follow up question from the link above. I am running Samba 3.0.23d on FreeBSD is release 7.1 I changed the policies as described above but still cannot connect to the samba server with the windows 7 or a server 2008. I feel it is a problem with recognizing the new machines on the network. the windows machines can see the samba server, but cannot connect to it or view any of the files. After changing the security policies the samba server asked for network id and password but would not allow the machine to connect, said they were unknown username or bad password. Here is my current config file. there is no sign of encryption anywhere, should I just add the line? not sure what that would do elsewhere. Workgroup = WWOFFSET server string = WWO File Server (%v) security = server username map = /usr/local/etc/smb.users hosts allow = 10. 127. # If you want to automatically load your printer list rather # than setting them up individually then you'll need this ; load printers = yes # you may wish to override the location of the printcap file ; printcap name = /etc/printcap # on SystemV system setting printcap name to lpstat should allow # you to automatically obtain a printer list from the SystemV spool # system ; printcap name = lpstat # It should not be necessary to specify the print system type unless # it is non-standard. Currently supported print systems include: # bsd, cups, sysv, plp, lprng, aix, hpux, qnx ; printing = cups # Uncomment this if you want a guest account, you must add this to /etc/passwd # otherwise the user "nobody" is used ; guest account = pcguest # this tells Samba to use a separate log file for each machine # that connects log file = /var/log/samba/log.%m # Put a capping on the size of the log files (in Kb). max log size = 50 # Use password server option only with security = server # The argument list may include: # password server = My_PDC_Name [My_BDC_Name] [My_Next_BDC_Name] # or to auto-locate the domain controller/s # password server = * ; password server = <NT-Server-Name> password server = SERVER0 # Use the realm option only with security = ads # Specifies the Active Directory realm the host is part of ; realm = MY_REALM # Backend to store user information in. New installations should # use either tdbsam or ldapsam. smbpasswd is available for backwards # compatibility. tdbsam requires no further configuration. ; passdb backend = tdbsam ; passdb backend = smbpasswd # Using the following line enables you to customise your configuration # on a per machine basis. The %m gets replaced with the netbios name # of the machine that is connecting. # Note: Consider carefully the location in the configuration file of # this line. The included file is read at that point. ; include = /usr/local/etc/smb.conf.%m # Most people will find that this option gives better performance. # See the chapter 'Samba performance issues' in the Samba HOWTO Collection # and the manual pages for details. # You may want to add the following on a Linux system: # SO_RCVBUF=8192 SO_SNDBUF=8192 socket options = TCP_NODELAY # Configure Samba to use multiple interfaces # If you have multiple network interfaces then you must list them # here. See the man page for details. ; interfaces = 192.168.12.2/24 192.168.13.2/24 # Browser Control Options: # set local master to no if you don't want Samba to become a master # browser on your network. Otherwise the normal election rules apply ; local master = no # OS Level determines the precedence of this server in master browser # elections. The default value should be reasonable ; os level = 33 # Domain Master specifies Samba to be the Domain Master Browser. This # allows Samba to collate browse lists between subnets. Don't use this # if you already have a Windows NT domain controller doing this job ; domain master = yes # Preferred Master causes Samba to force a local browser election on startup # and gives it a slightly higher chance of winning the election ; preferred master = yes # Enable this if you want Samba to be a domain logon server for # Windows95 workstations. ; domain logons = yes # if you enable domain logons then you may want a per-machine or # per user logon script # run a specific logon batch file per workstation (machine) ; logon script = %m.bat # run a specific logon batch file per username ; logon script = %U.bat # Where to store roving profiles (only for Win95 and WinNT) # %L substitutes for this servers netbios name, %U is username # You must uncomment the [Profiles] share below ; logon path = \\%L\Profiles\%U # Windows Internet Name Serving Support Section: # WINS Support - Tells the NMBD component of Samba to enable it's WINS Server ; wins support = yes # WINS Server - Tells the NMBD components of Samba to be a WINS Client # Note: Samba can be either a WINS Server, or a WINS Client, but NOT both ; wins server = w.x.y.z # WINS Proxy - Tells Samba to answer name resolution queries on # behalf of a non WINS capable client, for this to work there must be # at least one WINS Server on the network. The default is NO. ; wins proxy = yes # DNS Proxy - tells Samba whether or not to try to resolve NetBIOS names # via DNS nslookups. The default is NO. dns proxy = no # charset settings ; display charset = ASCII ; unix charset = ASCII ; dos charset = ASCII # These scripts are used on a domain controller or stand-alone # machine to add or delete corresponding unix accounts ; add user script = /usr/sbin/useradd %u ; add group script = /usr/sbin/groupadd %g ; add machine script = /usr/sbin/adduser -n -g machines -c Machine -d /dev/null -s /bin/false %u ; delete user script = /usr/sbin/userdel %u ; delete user from group script = /usr/sbin/deluser %u %g ; delete group script = /usr/sbin/groupdel %g unix extensions = no

    Read the article

  • 64-bit Archives Needed

    - by user9154181
    A little over a year ago, we received a question from someone who was trying to build software on Solaris. He was getting errors from the ar command when creating an archive. At that time, the ar command on Solaris was a 32-bit command. There was more than 2GB of data, and the ar command was hitting the file size limit for a 32-bit process that doesn't use the largefile APIs. Even in 2011, 2GB is a very large amount of code, so we had not heard this one before. Most of our toolchain was extended to handle 64-bit sized data back in the 1990's, but archives were not changed, presumably because there was no perceived need for it. Since then of course, programs have continued to get larger, and in 2010, the time had finally come to investigate the issue and find a way to provide for larger archives. As part of that process, I had to do a deep dive into the archive format, and also do some Unix archeology. I'm going to record what I learned here, to document what Solaris does, and in the hope that it might help someone else trying to solve the same problem for their platform. Archive Format Details Archives are hardly cutting edge technology. They are still used of course, but their basic form hasn't changed in decades. Other than to fix a bug, which is rare, we don't tend to touch that code much. The archive file format is described in /usr/include/ar.h, and I won't repeat the details here. Instead, here is a rough overview of the archive file format, implemented by System V Release 4 (SVR4) Unix systems such as Solaris: Every archive starts with a "magic number". This is a sequence of 8 characters: "!<arch>\n". The magic number is followed by 1 or more members. A member starts with a fixed header, defined by the ar_hdr structure in/usr/include/ar.h. Immediately following the header comes the data for the member. Members must be padded at the end with newline characters so that they have even length. The requirement to pad members to an even length is a dead giveaway as to the age of the archive format. It tells you that this format dates from the 1970's, and more specifically from the era of 16-bit systems such as the PDP-11 that Unix was originally developed on. A 32-bit system would have required 4 bytes, and 64-bit systems such as we use today would probably have required 8 bytes. 2 byte alignment is a poor choice for ELF object archive members. 32-bit objects require 4 byte alignment, and 64-bit objects require 64-bit alignment. The link-editor uses mmap() to process archives, and if the members have the wrong alignment, we have to slide (copy) them to the correct alignment before we can access the ELF data structures inside. The archive format requires 2 byte padding, but it doesn't prohibit more. The Solaris ar command takes advantage of this, and pads ELF object members to 8 byte boundaries. Anything else is padded to 2 as required by the format. The archive header (ar_hdr) represents all numeric values using an ASCII text representation rather than as binary integers. This means that an archive that contains only text members can be viewed using tools such as cat, more, or a text editor. The original designers of this format clearly thought that archives would be used for many file types, and not just for objects. Things didn't turn out that way of course — nearly all archives contain relocatable objects for a single operating system and machine, and are used primarily as input to the link-editor (ld). Archives can have special members that are created by the ar command rather than being supplied by the user. These special members are all distinguished by having a name that starts with the slash (/) character. This is an unambiguous marker that says that the user could not have supplied it. The reason for this is that regular archive members are given the plain name of the file that was inserted to create them, and any path components are stripped off. Slash is the delimiter character used by Unix to separate path components, and as such cannot occur within a plain file name. The ar command hides the special members from you when you list the contents of an archive, so most users don't know that they exist. There are only two possible special members: A symbol table that maps ELF symbols to the object archive member that provides it, and a string table used to hold member names that exceed 15 characters. The '/' convention for tagging special members provides room for adding more such members should the need arise. As I will discuss below, we took advantage of this fact to add an alternate 64-bit symbol table special member which is used in archives that are larger than 4GB. When an archive contains ELF object members, the ar command builds a special archive member known as the symbol table that maps all ELF symbols in the object to the archive member that provides it. The link-editor uses this symbol table to determine which symbols are provided by the objects in that archive. If an archive has a symbol table, it will always be the first member in the archive, immediately following the magic number. Unlike member headers, symbol tables do use binary integers to represent offsets. These integers are always stored in big-endian format, even on a little endian host such as x86. The archive header (ar_hdr) provides 15 characters for representing the member name. If any member has a name that is longer than this, then the real name is written into a special archive member called the string table, and the member's name field instead contains a slash (/) character followed by a decimal representation of the offset of the real name within the string table. The string table is required to precede all normal archive members, so it will be the second member if the archive contains a symbol table, and the first member otherwise. The archive format is not designed to make finding a given member easy. Such operations move through the archive from front to back examining each member in turn, and run in O(n) time. This would be bad if archives were commonly used in that manner, but in general, they are not. Typically, the ar command is used to build an new archive from scratch, inserting all the objects in one operation, and then the link-editor accesses the members in the archive in constant time by using the offsets provided by the symbol table. Both of these operations are reasonably efficient. However, listing the contents of a large archive with the ar command can be rather slow. Factors That Limit Solaris Archive Size As is often the case, there was more than one limiting factor preventing Solaris archives from growing beyond the 32-bit limits of 2GB (32-bit signed) and 4GB (32-bit unsigned). These limits are listed in the order they are hit as archive size grows, so the earlier ones mask those that follow. The original Solaris archive file format can handle sizes up to 4GB without issue. However, the ar command was delivered as a 32-bit executable that did not use the largefile APIs. As such, the ar command itself could not create a file larger than 2GB. One can solve this by building ar with the largefile APIs which would allow it to reach 4GB, but a simpler and better answer is to deliver a 64-bit ar, which has the ability to scale well past 4GB. Symbol table offsets are stored as 32-bit big-endian binary integers, which limits the maximum archive size to 4GB. To get around this limit requires a different symbol table format, or an extension mechanism to the current one, similar in nature to the way member names longer than 15 characters are handled in member headers. The size field in the archive member header (ar_hdr) is an ASCII string capable of representing a 32-bit unsigned value. This places a 4GB size limit on the size of any individual member in an archive. In considering format extensions to get past these limits, it is important to remember that very few archives will require the ability to scale past 4GB for many years. The old format, while no beauty, continues to be sufficient for its purpose. This argues for a backward compatible fix that allows newer versions of Solaris to produce archives that are compatible with older versions of the system unless the size of the archive exceeds 4GB. Archive Format Differences Among Unix Variants While considering how to extend Solaris archives to scale to 64-bits, I wanted to know how similar archives from other Unix systems are to those produced by Solaris, and whether they had already solved the 64-bit issue. I've successfully moved archives between different Unix systems before with good luck, so I knew that there was some commonality. If it turned out that there was already a viable defacto standard for 64-bit archives, it would obviously be better to adopt that rather than invent something new. The archive file format is not formally standardized. However, the ar command and archive format were part of the original Unix from Bell Labs. Other systems started with that format, extending it in various often incompatible ways, but usually with the same common shared core. Most of these systems use the same magic number to identify their archives, despite the fact that their archives are not always fully compatible with each other. It is often true that archives can be copied between different Unix variants, and if the member names are short enough, the ar command from one system can often read archives produced on another. In practice, it is rare to find an archive containing anything other than objects for a single operating system and machine type. Such an archive is only of use on the type of system that created it, and is only used on that system. This is probably why cross platform compatibility of archives between Unix variants has never been an issue. Otherwise, the use of the same magic number in archives with incompatible formats would be a problem. I was able to find information for a number of Unix variants, described below. These can be divided roughly into three tribes, SVR4 Unix, BSD Unix, and IBM AIX. Solaris is a SVR4 Unix, and its archives are completely compatible with those from the other members of that group (GNU/Linux, HP-UX, and SGI IRIX). AIX AIX is an exception to rule that Unix archive formats are all based on the original Bell labs Unix format. It appears that AIX supports 2 formats (small and big), both of which differ in fundamental ways from other Unix systems: These formats use a different magic number than the standard one used by Solaris and other Unix variants. They include support for removing archive members from a file without reallocating the file, marking dead areas as unused, and reusing them when new archive items are inserted. They have a special table of contents member (File Member Header) which lets you find out everything that's in the archive without having to actually traverse the entire file. Their symbol table members are quite similar to those from other systems though. Their member headers are doubly linked, containing offsets to both the previous and next members. Of the Unix systems described here, AIX has the only format I saw that will have reasonable insert/delete performance for really large archives. Everyone else has O(n) performance, and are going to be slow to use with large archives. BSD BSD has gone through 4 versions of archive format, which are described in their manpage. They use the same member header as SVR4, but their symbol table format is different, and their scheme for long member names puts the name directly after the member header rather than into a string table. GNU/Linux The GNU toolchain uses the SVR4 format, and is compatible with Solaris. HP-UX HP-UX seems to follow the SVR4 model, and is compatible with Solaris. IRIX IRIX has 32 and 64-bit archives. The 32-bit format is the standard SVR4 format, and is compatible with Solaris. The 64-bit format is the same, except that the symbol table uses 64-bit integers. IRIX assumes that an archive contains objects of a single ELFCLASS/MACHINE, and any archive containing ELFCLASS64 objects receives a 64-bit symbol table. Although they only use it for 64-bit objects, nothing in the archive format limits it to ELFCLASS64. It would be perfectly valid to produce a 64-bit symbol table in an archive containing 32-bit objects, text files, or anything else. Tru64 Unix (Digital/Compaq/HP) Tru64 Unix uses a format much like ours, but their symbol table is a hash table, making specific symbol lookup much faster. The Solaris link-editor uses archives by examining the entire symbol table looking for unsatisfied symbols for the link, and not by looking up individual symbols, so there would be no benefit to Solaris from such a hash table. The Tru64 ld must use a different approach in which the hash table pays off for them. Widening the existing SVR4 archive symbol tables rather than inventing something new is the simplest path forward. There is ample precedent for this approach in the ELF world. When ELF was extended to support 64-bit objects, the approach was largely to take the existing data structures, and define 64-bit versions of them. We called the old set ELF32, and the new set ELF64. My guess is that there was no need to widen the archive format at that time, but had there been, it seems obvious that this is how it would have been done. The Implementation of 64-bit Solaris Archives As mentioned earlier, there was no desire to improve the fundamental nature of archives. They have always had O(n) insert/delete behavior, and for the most part it hasn't mattered. AIX made efforts to improve this, but those efforts did not find widespread adoption. For the purposes of link-editing, which is essentially the only thing that archives are used for, the existing format is adequate, and issues of backward compatibility trump the desire to do something technically better. Widening the existing symbol table format to 64-bits is therefore the obvious way to proceed. For Solaris 11, I implemented that, and I also updated the ar command so that a 64-bit version is run by default. This eliminates the 2 most significant limits to archive size, leaving only the limit on an individual archive member. We only generate a 64-bit symbol table if the archive exceeds 4GB, or when the new -S option to the ar command is used. This maximizes backward compatibility, as an archive produced by Solaris 11 is highly likely to be less than 4GB in size, and will therefore employ the same format understood by older versions of the system. The main reason for the existence of the -S option is to allow us to test the 64-bit format without having to construct huge archives to do so. I don't believe it will find much use outside of that. Other than the new ability to create and use extremely large archives, this change is largely invisible to the end user. When reading an archive, the ar command will transparently accept either form of symbol table. Similarly, the ELF library (libelf) has been updated to understand either format. Users of libelf (such as the link-editor ld) do not need to be modified to use the new format, because these changes are encapsulated behind the existing functions provided by libelf. As mentioned above, this work did not lift the limit on the maximum size of an individual archive member. That limit remains fixed at 4GB for now. This is not because we think objects will never get that large, for the history of computing says otherwise. Rather, this is based on an estimation that single relocatable objects of that size will not appear for a decade or two. A lot can change in that time, and it is better not to overengineer things by writing code that will sit and rot for years without being used. It is not too soon however to have a plan for that eventuality. When the time comes when this limit needs to be lifted, I believe that there is a simple solution that is consistent with the existing format. The archive member header size field is an ASCII string, like the name, and as such, the overflow scheme used for long names can also be used to handle the size. The size string would be placed into the archive string table, and its offset in the string table would then be written into the archive header size field using the same format "/ddd" used for overflowed names.

    Read the article

  • Issue 15: Oracle Exadata Marketing Campaigns

    - by rituchhibber
         PARTNER FOCUS Oracle ExadataMarketing Campaign Steve McNickleVP Europe, cVidya Steve McNickle is VP Europe for cVidya, an innovative provider of revenue intelligence solutions for telecom, media and entertainment service providers including AT&T, BT, Deutsche Telecom and Vodafone. The company's product portfolio helps operators and service providers maximise margins, improve customer experience and optimise ecosystem relationships through revenue assurance, fraud and security management, sales performance management, pricing analytics, and inter-carrier services. cVidya has partnered with Oracle for more than a decade. RESOURCES -- Oracle PartnerNetwork (OPN) Oracle Exastack Program Oracle Exastack Optimized Oracle Exastack Labs and Enablement Resources Oracle Engineered Systems Oracle Communications cVidya SUBSCRIBE FEEDBACK PREVIOUS ISSUES Are you ready for Oracle OpenWorld this October? -- -- Please could you tell us a little about cVidya's partnering history with Oracle, and expand on your Oracle Exastack accreditations? "cVidya was established just over ten years ago and we've had a strong relationship with Oracle almost since the very beginning. Through our Revenue Intelligence work with some of the world's largest service providers we collect tremendous amounts of information, amounting to billions of records per day. We help our clients to collect, store and analyse that data to ensure that their end customers are getting the best levels of service, are billed correctly, and are happy that they are on the correct price plan. We have been an Oracle Gold level partner for seven years, and crucially just two months ago we were also accredited as Oracle Exastack Optimized for MoneyMap, our core Revenue Assurance solution. Very soon we also expect to be Oracle Exastack Optimized DRMap, our Data Retention solution." What unique capabilities and customer benefits does Oracle Exastack add to your applications? "Oracle Exastack enables us to deliver radical benefits to our customers. A typical mobile operator in the UK might handle between 500 million and two billion call data record details daily. Each transaction needs to be validated, billed correctly and fraud checked. Because of the enormous volumes involved, our clients demand scalable infrastructure that allows them to efficiently acquire, store and process all that data within controlled cost, space and environmental constraints. We have proved that the Oracle Exadata system can process data up to seven times faster and load it as much as 20 times faster than other standard best-of-breed server approaches. With the Oracle Exadata Database Machine they can reduce their datacentre equipment from say, the six or seven cabinets that they needed in the past, down to just one. This dramatic simplification delivers incredible value to the customer by cutting down enormously on all of their significant cost, space, energy, cooling and maintenance overheads." "The Oracle Exastack Program has given our clients the ability to switch their focus from reactive to proactive. Traditionally they may have spent 80 percent of their day processing, and just 20 percent enabling end customers to see advanced analytics, and avoiding issues before they occur. With our solutions and Oracle Exadata they can now switch that balance around entirely, resulting not only in reduced revenue leakage, but a far higher focus on proactive leakage prevention. How has the Oracle Exastack Program transformed your customer business? "We can already see the impact. Oracle solutions allow our delivery teams to achieve successful deployments, happy customers and self-satisfaction, and the power of Oracle's Exa solutions is easy to measure in terms of their transformational ability. We gained our first sale into a major European telco by demonstrating the major performance gains that would transform their business. Clients can measure the ease of organisational change, the early prevention of business issues, the reduction in manpower required to provide protection and coverage across all their products and services, plus of course end customer satisfaction. If customers know that that service is provided accurately and that their bills are calculated correctly, then over time this satisfaction can be attributed to revenue intelligence and the underlying systems which provide it. Combine this with the further integration we have with the other layers of the Oracle stack, including the telecommunications offerings such as NCC, OCDM and BRM, and the result is even greater customer value—not to mention the increased speed to market and the reduced project risk." What does the Oracle Exastack community bring to cVidya, both in terms of general benefits, and also tangible new opportunities and partnerships? "A great deal. We have participated in the Oracle Exastack community heavily over the past year, and have had lots of meetings with Oracle and our peers around the globe. It brings us into contact with like-minded, innovative partners, who like us are not happy to just stand still and want to take fresh technology to their customer base in order to gain enhanced value. We identified three new partnerships in each of two recent meetings, and hope these will open up new opportunities, not only in areas that exactly match where we operate today, but also in some new associative areas that will expand our reach into new business sectors. Notably, thanks to the Exastack community we were invited on stage at last year's Oracle OpenWorld conference. Appearing so publically with Oracle senior VP Judson Althoff elevated awareness and visibility of cVidya and has enabled us to participate in a number of other events with Oracle over the past eight months. We've been involved in speaking opportunities, forums and exhibitions, providing us with invaluable opportunities that we wouldn't otherwise have got close to." How has Exastack differentiated cVidya as an ISV, and helped you to evolve your business to the next level? "When we are selling to our core customer base of Tier 1 telecommunications providers, we know that they want more than just software. They want an enduring partnership that will last many years, they want innovation, and a forward thinking partner who knows how to guide them on where they need to be to meet market demand three, five or seven years down the line. Membership of respected global bodies, such as the Telemanagement Forum enables us to lead standard adherence in our area of business, giving us a lot of credibility, but Oracle is also involved in this forum with its own telecommunications portfolio, strengthening our position still further. When we approach CEOs, CTOs and CIOs at the very largest Tier 1 operators, not only can we easily show them that our technology is fantastic, we can also talk about our strong partnership with Oracle, and our joint embracing of today's standards and tomorrow's innovation." Where would you like cVidya to be in one year's time? "We want to get all of our relevant products Oracle Exastack Optimized. Our MoneyMap Revenue Assurance solution is already Exastack Optimised, our DRMAP Data Retention Solution should be Exastack Optimised within the next month, and our FraudView Fraud Management solution within the next two to three months. We'd then like to extend our Oracle accreditation out to include other members of the Oracle Engineered Systems family. We are moving into the 'Big Data' space, and so we're obviously very keen to work closely with Oracle to conduct pilots, map new technologies onto Oracle Big Data platforms, and embrace and measure the benefits of other Oracle systems, namely Oracle Exalogic Elastic Cloud, the Oracle Exalytics In-Memory Machine and the Oracle SPARC SuperCluster. We would also like to examine how the Oracle Database Appliance might benefit our Tier 2 service provider customers. Finally, we'd also like to continue working with the Oracle Communications Global Business Unit (CGBU), furthering our integration with Oracle billing products so that we are able to quickly deploy fraud solutions into Oracle's Engineered System stack, give operational benefits to our clients that are pre-integrated, more cost-effective, and can be rapidly deployed rapidly and producing benefits in three months, not nine months." Chris Baker ,Senior Vice President, Oracle Worldwide ISV-OEM-Java Sales Chris Baker is the Global Head of ISV/OEM Sales responsible for working with ISV/OEM partners to maximise Oracle's business through those partners, whilst maximising those partners' business to their end users. Chris works with partners, customers, innovators, investors and employees to develop innovative business solutions using Oracle products, services and skills. Firstly, could you please explain Oracle's current strategy for ISV partners, globally and in EMEA? "Oracle customers use independent software vendor (ISV) applications to run their businesses. They use them to generate revenue and to fulfil obligations to their own customers. Our strategy is very straight-forward. We want all of our ISV partners and OEMs to concentrate on the things that they do the best – building applications to meet the unique industry and functional requirements of their customer. We want to ensure that we deliver a best in class application platform so the ISV is free to concentrate their effort on their application functionality and user experience We invest over four billion dollars in research and development every year, and we want our ISVs to benefit from all of that investment in operating systems, virtualisation, databases, middleware, engineered systems, and other hardware. By doing this, we help them to reduce their costs, gain more consistency and agility for quicker implementations, and also rapidly differentiate themselves from other application vendors. It's all about simplification because we believe that around 25 to 30 percent of the development costs incurred by many ISVs are caused by customising infrastructure and have nothing to do with their applications. Our strategy is to enable our ISV partners to standardise their application platform using engineered architecture, so they can write once to the Oracle stack and deploy seamlessly in the cloud, on-premise, or in hybrid deployments. It's really important that architecture is the same in order to keep cost and time overheads at a minimum, so we provide standardisation and an environment that enables our ISVs to concentrate on the core business that makes them the most money and brings them success." How do you believe this strategy is helping the ISVs to work hand-in-hand with Oracle to ensure that end customers get the industry-leading solutions that they need? "We work with our ISVs not just to help them be successful, but also to help them market themselves. We have something called the 'Oracle Exastack Ready Program', which enables ISVs to publicise themselves as 'Ready' to run the core software platforms that run on Oracle's engineered systems including Exadata and Exalogic. So, for example, they can become 'Database Ready' which means that they use the latest version of Oracle Database and therefore can run their application without modification on Exadata or the Oracle Database Appliance. Alternatively, they can become WebLogic Ready, Oracle Linux Ready and Oracle Solaris Ready which means they run on the latest release and therefore can run their application, with no new porting work, on Oracle Exalogic. Those 'Ready' logos are important in helping ISVs advertise to their customers that they are using the latest technologies which have been fully tested. We now also have Exadata Ready and Exalogic Ready programmes which allow ISVs to promote the certification of their applications on these platforms. This highlights these partners to Oracle customers as having solutions that run fluently on the Oracle Exadata Database Machine, the Oracle Exalogic Elastic Cloud or one of our other engineered systems. This makes it easy for customers to identify solutions and provides ISVs with an avenue to connect with Oracle customers who are rapidly adopting engineered systems. We have also taken this programme to the next level in the shape of 'Oracle Exastack Optimized' for partners whose applications run best on the Oracle stack and have invested the time to fully optimise application performance. We ensure that Exastack Optimized partner status is promoted and supported by press releases, and we help our ISVs go to market and differentiate themselves through the use our technology and the standardisation it delivers. To date we have had several hundred organisations successfully work through our Exastack Optimized programme." How does Oracle's strategy of offering pre-integrated open platform software and hardware allow ISVs to bring their products to market more quickly? "One of the problems for many ISVs is that they have to think very carefully about the technology on which their solutions will be deployed, particularly in the cloud or hosted environments. They have to think hard about how they secure these environments, whether the concern is, for example, middleware, identity management, or securing personal data. If they don't use the technology that we build-in to our products to help them to fulfil these roles, they then have to build it themselves. This takes time, requires testing, and must be maintained. By taking advantage of our technology, partners will now know that they have a standard platform. They will know that they can confidently talk about implementation being the same every time they do it. Very large ISV applications could once take a year or two to be implemented at an on-premise environment. But it wasn't just the configuration of the application that took the time, it was actually the infrastructure - the different hardware configurations, operating systems and configurations of databases and middleware. Now we strongly believe that it's all about standardisation and repeatability. It's about making sure that our partners can do it once and are then able to roll it out many different times using standard componentry." What actions would you recommend for existing ISV partners that are looking to do more business with Oracle and its customer base, not only to maximise benefits, but also to maximise partner relationships? "My team, around the world and in the EMEA region, is available and ready to talk to any of our ISVs and to explore the possibilities together. We run programmes like 'Excite' and 'Insight' to help us to understand how we can help ISVs with architecture and widen their environments. But we also want to work with, and look at, new opportunities - for example, the Machine-to-Machine (M2M) market or 'The Internet of Things'. Over the next few years, many millions, indeed billions of devices will be collecting massive amounts of data and communicating it back to the central systems where ISVs will be running their applications. The only way that our partners will be able to provide a single vendor 'end-to-end' solution is to use Oracle integrated systems at the back end and Java on the 'smart' devices collecting the data – a complete solution from device to data centre. So there are huge opportunities to work closely with our ISVs, using Oracle's complete M2M platform, to provide the infrastructure that enables them to extract maximum value from the data collected. If any partners don't know where to start or who to contact, then they can contact me directly at [email protected] or indeed any of our teams across the EMEA region. We want to work with ISVs to help them to be as successful as they possibly can through simplification and speed to market, and we also want all of the top ISVs in the world based on Oracle." What opportunities are immediately opened to new ISV partners joining the OPN? "As you know OPN is very, very important. New members will discover a huge amount of content that instantly becomes accessible to them. They can access a wealth of no-cost training and enablement materials to build their expertise in Oracle technology. They can download Oracle software and use it for development projects. They can help themselves become more competent by becoming part of a true community and uncovering new opportunities by working with Oracle and their peers in the Oracle Partner Network. As well as publishing massive amounts of information on OPN, we also hold our global Oracle OpenWorld event, at which partners play a huge role. This takes place at the end of September and the beginning of October in San Francisco. Attending ISV partners have an unrivalled opportunity to contribute to elements such as the OpenWorld / OPN Exchange, at which they can talk to other partners and really begin thinking about how they can move their businesses on and play key roles in a very large ecosystem which revolves around technology and standardisation." Finally, are there any other messages that you would like to share with the Oracle ISV community? "The crucial message that I always like to reinforce is architecture, architecture and architecture! The key opportunities that ISVs have today revolve around standardising their architectures so that they can confidently think: “I will I be able to do exactly the same thing whenever a customer is looking to deploy on-premise, hosted or in the cloud”. The right architecture is critical to being competitive and to really start changing the game. We want to help our ISV partners to do just that; to establish standard architecture and to seize the opportunities it opens up for them. New market opportunities like M2M are enormous - just look at how many devices are all around you right now. We can help our partners to interface with these devices more effectively while thinking about their entire ecosystem, rather than just the piece that they have traditionally focused upon. With standardised architecture, we can help people dramatically improve their speed, reach, agility and delivery of enhanced customer satisfaction and value all the way from the Java side to their centralised systems. All Oracle ISV partners must take advantage of these opportunities, which is why Oracle will continue to invest in and support them." -- Gergely Strbik is Oracle Hardware and Software Product Manager for Avnet in Hungary. Avnet Technology Solutions is an OracleValue Added Distributor focused on the development of the existing Oracle channel. This includes the recruitment and enablement of Oracle partners as well as driving deeper adoption of Oracle's technology and application products within the IT channel. "The main business benefits of ODA for our customers and partners are scalability, flexibility, a great price point for the high performance delivered, and the easily configurable embedded Linux operating system. People welcome a lower point of entry and the ability to grow capacity on demand as their business expands." "Marketing and selling the ODA requires another way of thinking because it is an appliance. We have to transform the ways in which our partners and customers think from buying hardware and software independently to buying complete solutions. Successful early adopters and satisfied customer reactions will certainly help us to sell the ODA. We will have more experience with the product after the first deliveries and installations—end users need to see the power and benefits for themselves." "Our typical ODA customers will be those looking for complete solutions from a single reseller partner who is also able to manage the appliance. They will have enjoyed using Oracle Database but now want a new product that is able to unlock new levels of performance. A higher proportion of potential customers will come from our existing Oracle base, with around 30% from new business, but we intend to evangelise the ODA on the market to see how we can change this balance as all our customers adjust to the concept of 'Hardware and Software, Engineered to Work Together'. -- Back to the welcome page

    Read the article

  • Basics of Join Factorization

    - by Hong Su
    We continue our series on optimizer transformations with a post that describes the Join Factorization transformation. The Join Factorization transformation was introduced in Oracle 11g Release 2 and applies to UNION ALL queries. Union all queries are commonly used in database applications, especially in data integration applications. In many scenarios the branches in a UNION All query share a common processing, i.e, refer to the same tables. In the current Oracle execution strategy, each branch of a UNION ALL query is evaluated independently, which leads to repetitive processing, including data access and join. The join factorization transformation offers an opportunity to share the common computations across the UNION ALL branches. Currently, join factorization only factorizes common references to base tables only, i.e, not views. Consider a simple example of query Q1. Q1:    select t1.c1, t2.c2    from t1, t2, t3    where t1.c1 = t2.c1 and t1.c1 > 1 and t2.c2 = 2 and t2.c2 = t3.c2   union all    select t1.c1, t2.c2    from t1, t2, t4    where t1.c1 = t2.c1 and t1.c1 > 1 and t2.c3 = t4.c3; Table t1 appears in both the branches. As does the filter predicates on t1 (t1.c1 > 1) and the join predicates involving t1 (t1.c1 = t2.c1). Nevertheless, without any transformation, the scan (and the filtering) on t1 has to be done twice, once per branch. Such a query may benefit from join factorization which can transform Q1 into Q2 as follows: Q2:    select t1.c1, VW_JF_1.item_2    from t1, (select t2.c1 item_1, t2.c2 item_2                   from t2, t3                    where t2.c2 = t3.c2 and t2.c2 = 2                                  union all                   select t2.c1 item_1, t2.c2 item_2                   from t2, t4                    where t2.c3 = t4.c3) VW_JF_1    where t1.c1 = VW_JF_1.item_1 and t1.c1 > 1; In Q2, t1 is "factorized" and thus the table scan and the filtering on t1 is done only once (it's shared). If t1 is large, then avoiding one extra scan of t1 can lead to a huge performance improvement. Another benefit of join factorization is that it can open up more join orders. Let's look at query Q3. Q3:    select *    from t5, (select t1.c1, t2.c2                  from t1, t2, t3                  where t1.c1 = t2.c1 and t1.c1 > 1 and t2.c2 = 2 and t2.c2 = t3.c2                 union all                  select t1.c1, t2.c2                  from t1, t2, t4                  where t1.c1 = t2.c1 and t1.c1 > 1 and t2.c3 = t4.c3) V;   where t5.c1 = V.c1 In Q3, view V is same as Q1. Before join factorization, t1, t2 and t3 must be joined first before they can be joined with t5. But if join factorization factorizes t1 from view V, t1 can then be joined with t5. This opens up new join orders. That being said, join factorization imposes certain join orders. For example, in Q2, t2 and t3 appear in the first branch of the UNION ALL query in view VW_JF_1. T2 must be joined with t3 before it can be joined with t1 which is outside of the VW_JF_1 view. The imposed join order may not necessarily be the best join order. For this reason, join factorization is performed under cost-based transformation framework; this means that we cost the plans with and without join factorization and choose the cheapest plan. Note that if the branches in UNION ALL have DISTINCT clauses, join factorization is not valid. For example, Q4 is NOT semantically equivalent to Q5.   Q4:     select distinct t1.*      from t1, t2      where t1.c1 = t2.c1  union all      select distinct t1.*      from t1, t2      where t1.c1 = t2.c1 Q5:    select distinct t1.*     from t1, (select t2.c1 item_1                   from t2                union all                   select t2.c1 item_1                  from t2) VW_JF_1     where t1.c1 = VW_JF_1.item_1 Q4 might return more rows than Q5. Q5's results are guaranteed to be duplicate free because of the DISTINCT key word at the top level while Q4's results might contain duplicates.   The examples given so far involve inner joins only. Join factorization is also supported in outer join, anti join and semi join. But only the right tables of outer join, anti join and semi joins can be factorized. It is not semantically correct to factorize the left table of outer join, anti join or semi join. For example, Q6 is NOT semantically equivalent to Q7. Q6:     select t1.c1, t2.c2    from t1, t2    where t1.c1 = t2.c1(+) and t2.c2 (+) = 2  union all    select t1.c1, t2.c2    from t1, t2      where t1.c1 = t2.c1(+) and t2.c2 (+) = 3 Q7:     select t1.c1, VW_JF_1.item_2    from t1, (select t2.c1 item_1, t2.c2 item_2                  from t2                  where t2.c2 = 2                union all                  select t2.c1 item_1, t2.c2 item_2                  from t2                                                                                                    where t2.c2 = 3) VW_JF_1       where t1.c1 = VW_JF_1.item_1(+)                                                                  However, the right side of an outer join can be factorized. For example, join factorization can transform Q8 to Q9 by factorizing t2, which is the right table of an outer join. Q8:    select t1.c2, t2.c2    from t1, t2      where t1.c1 = t2.c1 (+) and t1.c1 = 1 union all    select t1.c2, t2.c2    from t1, t2    where t1.c1 = t2.c1(+) and t1.c1 = 2 Q9:   select VW_JF_1.item_2, t2.c2   from t2,             (select t1.c1 item_1, t1.c2 item_2            from t1            where t1.c1 = 1           union all            select t1.c1 item_1, t1.c2 item_2            from t1            where t1.c1 = 2) VW_JF_1   where VW_JF_1.item_1 = t2.c1(+) All of the examples in this blog show factorizing a single table from two branches. This is just for ease of illustration. Join factorization can factorize multiple tables and from more than two UNION ALL branches.  SummaryJoin factorization is a cost-based transformation. It can factorize common computations from branches in a UNION ALL query which can lead to huge performance improvement. 

    Read the article

  • Does anyone really understand how HFSC scheduling in Linux/BSD works?

    - by Mecki
    I read the original SIGCOMM '97 PostScript paper about HFSC, it is very technically, but I understand the basic concept. Instead of giving a linear service curve (as with pretty much every other scheduling algorithm), you can specify a convex or concave service curve and thus it is possible to decouple bandwidth and delay. However, even though this paper mentions to kind of scheduling algorithms being used (real-time and link-share), it always only mentions ONE curve per scheduling class (the decoupling is done by specifying this curve, only one curve is needed for that). Now HFSC has been implemented for BSD (OpenBSD, FreeBSD, etc.) using the ALTQ scheduling framework and it has been implemented Linux using the TC scheduling framework (part of iproute2). Both implementations added two additional service curves, that were NOT in the original paper! A real-time service curve and an upper-limit service curve. Again, please note that the original paper mentions two scheduling algorithms (real-time and link-share), but in that paper both work with one single service curve. There never have been two independent service curves for either one as you currently find in BSD and Linux. Even worse, some version of ALTQ seems to add an additional queue priority to HSFC (there is no such thing as priority in the original paper either). I found several BSD HowTo's mentioning this priority setting (even though the man page of the latest ALTQ release knows no such parameter for HSFC, so officially it does not even exist). This all makes the HFSC scheduling even more complex than the algorithm described in the original paper and there are tons of tutorials on the Internet that often contradict each other, one claiming the opposite of the other one. This is probably the main reason why nobody really seems to understand how HFSC scheduling really works. Before I can ask my questions, we need a sample setup of some kind. I'll use a very simple one as seen in the image below: Here are some questions I cannot answer because the tutorials contradict each other: What for do I need a real-time curve at all? Assuming A1, A2, B1, B2 are all 128 kbit/s link-share (no real-time curve for either one), then each of those will get 128 kbit/s if the root has 512 kbit/s to distribute (and A and B are both 256 kbit/s of course), right? Why would I additionally give A1 and B1 a real-time curve with 128 kbit/s? What would this be good for? To give those two a higher priority? According to original paper I can give them a higher priority by using a curve, that's what HFSC is all about after all. By giving both classes a curve of [256kbit/s 20ms 128kbit/s] both have twice the priority than A2 and B2 automatically (still only getting 128 kbit/s on average) Does the real-time bandwidth count towards the link-share bandwidth? E.g. if A1 and B1 both only have 64kbit/s real-time and 64kbit/s link-share bandwidth, does that mean once they are served 64kbit/s via real-time, their link-share requirement is satisfied as well (they might get excess bandwidth, but lets ignore that for a second) or does that mean they get another 64 kbit/s via link-share? So does each class has a bandwidth "requirement" of real-time plus link-share? Or does a class only have a higher requirement than the real-time curve if the link-share curve is higher than the real-time curve (current link-share requirement equals specified link-share requirement minus real-time bandwidth already provided to this class)? Is upper limit curve applied to real-time as well, only to link-share, or maybe to both? Some tutorials say one way, some say the other way. Some even claim upper-limit is the maximum for real-time bandwidth + link-share bandwidth? What is the truth? Assuming A2 and B2 are both 128 kbit/s, does it make any difference if A1 and B1 are 128 kbit/s link-share only, or 64 kbit/s real-time and 128 kbit/s link-share, and if so, what difference? If I use the seperate real-time curve to increase priorities of classes, why would I need "curves" at all? Why is not real-time a flat value and link-share also a flat value? Why are both curves? The need for curves is clear in the original paper, because there is only one attribute of that kind per class. But now, having three attributes (real-time, link-share, and upper-limit) what for do I still need curves on each one? Why would I want the curves shape (not average bandwidth, but their slopes) to be different for real-time and link-share traffic? According to the little documentation available, real-time curve values are totally ignored for inner classes (class A and B), they are only applied to leaf classes (A1, A2, B1, B2). If that is true, why does the ALTQ HFSC sample configuration (search for 3.3 Sample configuration) set real-time curves on inner classes and claims that those set the guaranteed rate of those inner classes? Isn't that completely pointless? (note: pshare sets the link-share curve in ALTQ and grate the real-time curve; you can see this in the paragraph above the sample configuration). Some tutorials say the sum of all real-time curves may not be higher than 80% of the line speed, others say it must not be higher than 70% of the line speed. Which one is right or are they maybe both wrong? One tutorial said you shall forget all the theory. No matter how things really work (schedulers and bandwidth distribution), imagine the three curves according to the following "simplified mind model": real-time is the guaranteed bandwidth that this class will always get. link-share is the bandwidth that this class wants to become fully satisfied, but satisfaction cannot be guaranteed. In case there is excess bandwidth, the class might even get offered more bandwidth than necessary to become satisfied, but it may never use more than upper-limit says. For all this to work, the sum of all real-time bandwidths may not be above xx% of the line speed (see question above, the percentage varies). Question: Is this more or less accurate or a total misunderstanding of HSFC? And if assumption above is really accurate, where is prioritization in that model? E.g. every class might have a real-time bandwidth (guaranteed), a link-share bandwidth (not guaranteed) and an maybe an upper-limit, but still some classes have higher priority needs than other classes. In that case I must still prioritize somehow, even among real-time traffic of those classes. Would I prioritize by the slope of the curves? And if so, which curve? The real-time curve? The link-share curve? The upper-limit curve? All of them? Would I give all of them the same slope or each a different one and how to find out the right slope? I still haven't lost hope that there exists at least a hand full of people in this world that really understood HFSC and are able to answer all these questions accurately. And doing so without contradicting each other in the answers would be really nice ;-)

    Read the article

  • Nagging As A Strategy For Better Linking: -z guidance

    - by user9154181
    The link-editor (ld) in Solaris 11 has a new feature that we call guidance that is intended to help you build better objects. The basic idea behind guidance is that if (and only if) you request it, the link-editor will issue messages suggesting better options and other changes you might make to your ld command to get better results. You can choose to take the advice, or you can disable specific types of guidance while acting on others. In some ways, this works like an experienced friend leaning over your shoulder and giving you advice — you're free to take it or leave it as you see fit, but you get nudged to do a better job than you might have otherwise. We use guidance to build the core Solaris OS, and it has proven to be useful, both in improving our objects, and in making sure that regressions don't creep back in later. In this article, I'm going to describe the evolution in thinking and design that led to the implementation of the -z guidance option, as well as give a brief description of how it works. The guidance feature issues non-fatal warnings. However, experience shows that once developers get used to ignoring warnings, it is inevitable that real problems will be lost in the noise and ignored or missed. This is why we have a zero tolerance policy against build noise in the core Solaris OS. In order to get maximum benefit from -z guidance while maintaining this policy, I added the -z fatal-warnings option at the same time. Much of the material presented here is adapted from the arc case: PSARC 2010/312 Link-editor guidance The History Of Unfortunate Link-Editor Defaults The Solaris link-editor is one of the oldest Unix commands. It stands to reason that this would be true — in order to write an operating system, you need the ability to compile and link code. The original link-editor (ld) had defaults that made sense at the time. As new features were needed, command line option switches were added to let the user use them, while maintaining backward compatibility for those who didn't. Backward compatibility is always a concern in system design, but is particularly important in the case of the tool chain (compilers, linker, and related tools), since it is a basic building block for the entire system. Over the years, applications have grown in size and complexity. Important concepts like dynamic linking that didn't exist in the original Unix system were invented. Object file formats changed. In the case of System V Release 4 Unix derivatives like Solaris, the ELF (Extensible Linking Format) was adopted. Since then, the ELF system has evolved to provide tools needed to manage today's larger and more complex environments. Features such as lazy loading, and direct bindings have been added. In an ideal world, many of these options would be defaults, with rarely used options that allow the user to turn them off. However, the reality is exactly the reverse: For backward compatibility, these features are all options that must be explicitly turned on by the user. This has led to a situation in which most applications do not take advantage of the many improvements that have been made in linking over the last 20 years. If their code seems to link and run without issue, what motivation does a developer have to read a complex manpage, absorb the information provided, choose the features that matter for their application, and apply them? Experience shows that only the most motivated and diligent programmers will make that effort. We know that most programs would be improved if we could just get you to use the various whizzy features that we provide, but the defaults conspire against us. We have long wanted to do something to make it easier for our users to use the linkers more effectively. There have been many conversations over the years regarding this issue, and how to address it. They always break down along the following lines: Change ld Defaults Since the world would be a better place the newer ld features were the defaults, why not change things to make it so? This idea is simple, elegant, and impossible. Doing so would break a large number of existing applications, including those of ISVs, big customers, and a plethora of existing open source packages. In each case, the owner of that code may choose to follow our lead and fix their code, or they may view it as an invitation to reconsider their commitment to our platform. Backward compatibility, and our installed base of working software, is one of our greatest assets, and not something to be lightly put at risk. Breaking backward compatibility at this level of the system is likely to do more harm than good. But, it sure is tempting. New Link-Editor One might create a new linker command, not called 'ld', leaving the old command as it is. The new one could use the same code as ld, but would offer only modern options, with the proper defaults for features such as direct binding. The resulting link-editor would be a pleasure to use. However, the approach is doomed to niche status. There is a vast pile of exiting code in the world built around the existing ld command, that reaches back to the 1970's. ld use is embedded in large and unknown numbers of makefiles, and is used by name by compilers that execute it. A Unix link-editor that is not named ld will not find a majority audience no matter how good it might be. Finally, a new linker command will eventually cease to be new, and will accumulate its own burden of backward compatibility issues. An Option To Make ld Do The Right Things Automatically This line of reasoning is best summarized by a CR filed in 2005, entitled 6239804 make it easier for ld(1) to do what's best The idea is to have a '-z best' option that unchains ld from its backward compatibility commitment, and allows it to turn on the "best" set of features, as determined by the authors of ld. The specific set of features enabled by -z best would be subject to change over time, as requirements change. This idea is more realistic than the other two, but was never implemented because it has some important issues that we could never answer to our satisfaction: The -z best proposal assumes that the user can turn it on, and trust it to select good options without the user needing to be aware of the options being applied. This is a fallacy. Features such as direct bindings require the user to do some analysis to ensure that the resulting program will still operate properly. A user who is willing to do the work to verify that what -z best does will be OK for their application is capable of turning on those features directly, and therefore gains little added benefit from -z best. The intent is that when a user opts into -z best, that they understand that z best is subject to sometimes incompatible evolution. Experience teaches us that this won't work. People will use this feature, the meaning of -z best will change, code that used to build will fail, and then there will be complaints and demands to retract the change. When (not if) this occurs, we will of course defend our actions, and point at the disclaimer. We'll win some of those debates, and lose others. Ultimately, we'll end up with -z best2 (-z better), or other compromises, and our goal of simplifying the world will have failed. The -z best idea rolls up a set of features that may or may not be related to each other into a unit that must be taken wholesale, or not at all. It could be that only a subset of what it does is compatible with a given application, in which case the user is expected to abandon -z best and instead set the options that apply to their application directly. In doing so, they lose one of the benefits of -z best, that if you use it, future versions of ld may choose a different set of options, and automatically improve the object through the act of rebuilding it. I drew two conclusions from the above history: For a link-editor, backward compatibility is vital. If a given command line linked your application 10 years ago, you have every reason to expect that it will link today, assuming that the libraries you're linking against are still available and compatible with their previous interfaces. For an application of any size or complexity, there is no substitute for the work involved in examining the code and determining which linker options apply and which do not. These options are largely orthogonal to each other, and it can be reasonable not to use any or all of them, depending on the situation, even in modern applications. It is a mistake to tie them together. The idea for -z guidance came from consideration of these points. By decoupling the advice from the act of taking the advice, we can retain the good aspects of -z best while avoiding its pitfalls: -z guidance gives advice, but the decision to take that advice remains with the user who must evaluate its merit and make a decision to take it or not. As such, we are free to change the specific guidance given in future releases of ld, without breaking existing applications. The only fallout from this will be some new warnings in the build output, which can be ignored or dealt with at the user's convenience. It does not couple the various features given into a single "take it or leave it" option, meaning that there will never be a need to offer "-zguidance2", or other such variants as things change over time. Guidance has the potential to be our final word on this subject. The user is given the flexibility to disable specific categories of guidance without losing the benefit of others, including those that might be added to future versions of the system. Although -z fatal-warnings stands on its own as a useful feature, it is of particular interest in combination with -z guidance. Used together, the guidance turns from advice to hard requirement: The user must either make the suggested change, or explicitly reject the advice by specifying a guidance exception token, in order to get a build. This is valuable in environments with high coding standards. ld Command Line Options The guidance effort resulted in new link-editor options for guidance and for turning warnings into fatal errors. Before I reproduce that text here, I'd like to highlight the strategic decisions embedded in the guidance feature: In order to get guidance, you have to opt in. We hope you will opt in, and believe you'll get better objects if you do, but our default mode of operation will continue as it always has, with full backward compatibility, and without judgement. Guidance suggestions always offers specific advice, and not vague generalizations. You can disable some guidance without turning off the entire feature. When you get guidance warnings, you can choose to take the advice, or you can specify a keyword to disable guidance for just that category. This allows you to get guidance for things that are useful to you, without being bothered about things that you've already considered and dismissed. As the world changes, we will add new guidance to steer you in the right direction. All such new guidance will come with a keyword that let's you turn it off. In order to facilitate building your code on different versions of Solaris, we quietly ignore any guidance keywords we don't recognize, assuming that they are intended for newer versions of the link-editor. If you want to see what guidance tokens ld does and does not recognize on your system, you can use the ld debugging feature as follows: % ld -Dargs -z guidance=foo,nodefs debug: debug: Solaris Linkers: 5.11-1.2275 debug: debug: arg[1] option=-D: option-argument: args debug: arg[2] option=-z: option-argument: guidance=foo,nodefs debug: warning: unrecognized -z guidance item: foo The -z fatal-warning option is straightforward, and generally useful in environments with strict coding standards. Note that the GNU ld already had this feature, and we accept their option names as synonyms: -z fatal-warnings | nofatal-warnings --fatal-warnings | --no-fatal-warnings The -z fatal-warnings and the --fatal-warnings option cause the link-editor to treat warnings as fatal errors. The -z nofatal-warnings and the --no-fatal-warnings option cause the link-editor to treat warnings as non-fatal. This is the default behavior. The -z guidance option is defined as follows: -z guidance[=item1,item2,...] Provide guidance messages to suggest ld options that can improve the quality of the resulting object, or which are otherwise considered to be beneficial. The specific guidance offered is subject to change over time as the system evolves. Obsolete guidance offered by older versions of ld may be dropped in new versions. Similarly, new guidance may be added to new versions of ld. Guidance therefore always represents current best practices. It is possible to enable guidance, while preventing specific guidance messages, by providing a list of item tokens, representing the class of guidance to be suppressed. In this way, unwanted advice can be suppressed without losing the benefit of other guidance. Unrecognized item tokens are quietly ignored by ld, allowing a given ld command line to be executed on a variety of older or newer versions of Solaris. The guidance offered by the current version of ld, and the item tokens used to disable these messages, are as follows. Specify Required Dependencies Dynamic executables and shared objects should explicitly define all of the dependencies they require. Guidance recommends the use of the -z defs option, should any symbol references remain unsatisfied when building dynamic objects. This guidance can be disabled with -z guidance=nodefs. Do Not Specify Non-Required Dependencies Dynamic executables and shared objects should not define any dependencies that do not satisfy the symbol references made by the dynamic object. Guidance recommends that unused dependencies be removed. This guidance can be disabled with -z guidance=nounused. Lazy Loading Dependencies should be identified for lazy loading. Guidance recommends the use of the -z lazyload option should any dependency be processed before either a -z lazyload or -z nolazyload option is encountered. This guidance can be disabled with -z guidance=nolazyload. Direct Bindings Dependencies should be referenced with direct bindings. Guidance recommends the use of the -B direct, or -z direct options should any dependency be processed before either of these options, or the -z nodirect option is encountered. This guidance can be disabled with -z guidance=nodirect. Pure Text Segment Dynamic objects should not contain relocations to non-writable, allocable sections. Guidance recommends compiling objects with Position Independent Code (PIC) should any relocations against the text segment remain, and neither the -z textwarn or -z textoff options are encountered. This guidance can be disabled with -z guidance=notext. Mapfile Syntax All mapfiles should use the version 2 mapfile syntax. Guidance recommends the use of the version 2 syntax should any mapfiles be encountered that use the version 1 syntax. This guidance can be disabled with -z guidance=nomapfile. Library Search Path Inappropriate dependencies that are encountered by ld are quietly ignored. For example, a 32-bit dependency that is encountered when generating a 64-bit object is ignored. These dependencies can result from incorrect search path settings, such as supplying an incorrect -L option. Although benign, this dependency processing is wasteful, and might hide a build problem that should be solved. Guidance recommends the removal of any inappropriate dependencies. This guidance can be disabled with -z guidance=nolibpath. In addition, -z guidance=noall can be used to entirely disable the guidance feature. See Chapter 7, Link-Editor Quick Reference, in the Linker and Libraries Guide for more information on guidance and advice for building better objects. Example The following example demonstrates how the guidance feature is intended to work. We will build a shared object that has a variety of shortcomings: Does not specify all it's dependencies Specifies dependencies it does not use Does not use direct bindings Uses a version 1 mapfile Contains relocations to the readonly allocable text (not PIC) This scenario is sadly very common — many shared objects have one or more of these issues. % cat hello.c #include <stdio.h> #include <unistd.h> void hello(void) { printf("hello user %d\n", getpid()); } % cat mapfile.v1 # This version 1 mapfile will trigger a guidance message % cc hello.c -o hello.so -G -M mapfile.v1 -lelf As you can see, the operation completes without error, resulting in a usable object. However, turning on guidance reveals a number of things that could be better: % cc hello.c -o hello.so -G -M mapfile.v1 -lelf -zguidance ld: guidance: version 2 mapfile syntax recommended: mapfile.v1 ld: guidance: -z lazyload option recommended before first dependency ld: guidance: -B direct or -z direct option recommended before first dependency Undefined first referenced symbol in file getpid hello.o (symbol belongs to implicit dependency /lib/libc.so.1) printf hello.o (symbol belongs to implicit dependency /lib/libc.so.1) ld: warning: symbol referencing errors ld: guidance: -z defs option recommended for shared objects ld: guidance: removal of unused dependency recommended: libelf.so.1 warning: Text relocation remains referenced against symbol offset in file .rodata1 (section) 0xa hello.o getpid 0x4 hello.o printf 0xf hello.o ld: guidance: position independent (PIC) code recommended for shared objects ld: guidance: see ld(1) -z guidance for more information Given the explicit advice in the above guidance messages, it is relatively easy to modify the example to do the right things: % cat mapfile.v2 # This version 2 mapfile will not trigger a guidance message $mapfile_version 2 % cc hello.c -o hello.so -Kpic -G -Bdirect -M mapfile.v2 -lc -zguidance There are situations in which the guidance does not fit the object being built. For instance, you want to build an object without direct bindings: % cc -Kpic hello.c -o hello.so -G -M mapfile.v2 -lc -zguidance ld: guidance: -B direct or -z direct option recommended before first dependency ld: guidance: see ld(1) -z guidance for more information It is easy to disable that specific guidance warning without losing the overall benefit from allowing the remainder of the guidance feature to operate: % cc -Kpic hello.c -o hello.so -G -M mapfile.v2 -lc -zguidance=nodirect Conclusions The linking guidelines enforced by the ld guidance feature correspond rather directly to our standards for building the core Solaris OS. I'm sure that comes as no surprise. It only makes sense that we would want to build our own product as well as we know how. Solaris is usually the first significant test for any new linker feature. We now enable guidance by default for all builds, and the effect has been very positive. Guidance helps us find suboptimal objects more quickly. Programmers get concrete advice for what to change instead of vague generalities. Even in the cases where we override the guidance, the makefile rules to do so serve as documentation of the fact. Deciding to use guidance is likely to cause some up front work for most code, as it forces you to consider using new features such as direct bindings. Such investigation is worthwhile, but does not come for free. However, the guidance suggestions offer a structured and straightforward way to tackle modernizing your objects, and once that work is done, for keeping them that way. The investment is often worth it, and will replay you in terms of better performance and fewer problems. I hope that you find guidance to be as useful as we have.

    Read the article

  • How to safely reboot via First Boot script

    - by unixman
    With the cost and performance benefits of the SPARC T4 and SPARC T5 systems undeniably validated, the banking sector is actively moving to Solaris 11.  I was recently asked to help a banking customer of ours look at migrating some of their Solaris 10 logic over to Solaris 11.  While we've introduced a number of holistic improvements in Solaris 11, in terms of how we ease long-term software lifecycle management, it is important to appreciate that customers may not be able to move all of their Solaris 10 scripts and procedures at once; there are years of scripts that reflect fine-tuned requirements of proprietary banking software that gets layered on top of the operating system. One of these requirements is to go through a cycle of reboots, after the system is installed, in order to ensure appropriate software dependencies and various configuration files are in-place. While Solaris 10 introduced a facility that aids here, namely SMF, many of our customers simply haven't yet taken the time to take advantage of this - proceeding with logic that, while functional, without further analysis has an appearance of not being optimal in terms of taking advantage of all the niceties bundled in Solaris 11 at no extra cost. When looking at Solaris 11, we recognize that one of the vehicles that bridges the gap between getting the operating system image payload delivered, and the customized banking software installed, is a notion of a First Boot script.  I had a working example of this at one of the Oracle OpenWorld sessions a few years ago - we've since improved our documentation and have introduced sections where this is described in better detail.   If you're looking at this for the first time and you've not worked with IPS and SMF previously, you might get the sense that the tasks are daunting.   There is a set of technologies involved that are jointly engineered in order to make the process reliable, predictable and extensible. As you go down the path of writing your first boot script, you'll be faced with a need to wrap it into a SMF service and then packaged into a IPS package. The IPS package would then need to be placed onto your IPS repository, in order to subsequently be made available to all of your AI (Automated Install) clients (i.e. the systems that you're installing Solaris and your software onto).     With this blog post, I wanted to create a single place that outlines the entire process (simplistically), and provide a hint of how a good old "at" command may make the requirement of forcing an initial reboot handy. The syntax and references to commands here is based on running this on a version of Solaris 11 that has been updated since its initial release in 2011 (i.e. I am writing this on Solaris 11.1) Assuming you've built an AI server (see this How To article for an example), you might be asking yourself: "Ok, I've got some logic that I need executed AFTER Solaris is deployed and I need my own little script that would make that happen. How do I go about hooking that script into the Solaris 11 AI framework?"  You might start here, in Chapter 13 of the "Installing Oracle Solaris 11.1 Systems" guide, which talks about "Running a Custom Script During First Boot".  And as you do, you'll be confronted with command that might be unfamiliar to you if you're new to Solaris 11, like our dear new friend: svcbundle svcbundle is an aide to creating manifests and profiles.  It is awesome, but don't let its awesomeness overwhelm you. (See this How To article by my colleague Glynn Foster for a nice working example).  In order to get your script's logic integrated into the Solaris 11 deployment process, you need to wrap your (shell) script into 2 manifests -  a SMF service manifest and a IPS package manifest.  ....and if you're new to XML, well then -- buckle up We have some examples of small first boot scripts shown here, as templates to build upon. Necessary structure of the script, particularly in leveraging SMF interfaces, is key. I won't go into that here as that is covered nicely in the doc link above.    Let's say your script ends up looking like this (btw: if things appear to be cut-off in your browser, just select them, copy and paste into your editor and it'll be grabbed - the source gets captured eventhough the browser may not render it "correctly" - ah, computers). #!/bin/sh # Load SMF shell support definitions . /lib/svc/share/smf_include.sh # If nothing to do, exit with temporary disable completed=`svcprop -p config/completed site/first-boot-script-svc:default` [ "${completed}" = "true" ] && \ smf_method_exit $SMF_EXIT_TEMP_DISABLE completed "Configuration completed" # Obtain the active BE name from beadm: The active BE on reboot has an R in # the third column of 'beadm list' output. Its name is in column one. bename=`beadm list -Hd|nawk -F ';' '$3 ~ /R/ {print $1}'` beadm create ${bename}.orig echo "Original boot environment saved as ${bename}.orig" # ---- Place your one-time configuration tasks here ---- # For example, if you have to pull some files from your own pre-existing system: /usr/bin/wget -P /var/tmp/ $PULL_DOWN_ADDITIONAL_SCRIPTS_FROM_A_CORPORATE_SYSTEM /usr/bin/chmod 755 /var/tmp/$SCRIPTS_THAT_GOT_PULLED_DOWN_IN_STEP_ABOVE # Clearly the above 2 lines represent some logic that you'd have to customize to fit your needs. # # Perhaps additional things you may want to do here might be of use, like # (gasp!) configuring ssh server for root login and X11 forwarding (for testing), and the like... # # Oh and by the way, after we're done executing all of our proprietary scripts we need to reboot # the system in accordance with our operational software requirements to ensure all layered bits # get initialized properly and pull-in their own modules and components in the right sequence, # subsequently. # We need to set a "time bomb" reboot, that would take place upon completion of this script. # We already know that *this* script depends on multi-user-server SMF milestone, so it should be # safe for us to schedule a reboot for 5 minutes from now. The "at" job get scheduled in the queue # while our little script continues thru the rest of the logic. /usr/bin/at now + 5 minutes <<REBOOT /usr/bin/sync /usr/sbin/reboot REBOOT # ---- End of your customizations ---- # Record that this script's work is done svccfg -s site/first-boot-script-svc:default setprop config/completed = true svcadm refresh site/first-boot-script-svc:default smf_method_exit $SMF_EXIT_TEMP_DISABLE method_completed "Configuration completed"  ...and you're happy with it and are ready to move on. Where do you go and what do you do? The next step is creating the IPS package for your script. Since running the logic of your script constitutes a service, you need to create a service manifest. This is described here, in the middle of Chapter 13 of "Creating an IPS package for the script and service".  Assuming the name of your shell script is first-boot-script.sh, you could end up doing the following: $ cd some_working_directory_for_this_project$ mkdir -p proto/lib/svc/manifest/site$ mkdir -p proto/opt/site $ cp first-boot-script.sh proto/opt/site  Then you would create the service manifest  file like so: $ svcbundle -s service-name=site/first-boot-script-svc \ -s start-method=/opt/site/first-boot-script.sh \ -s instance-property=config:completed:boolean:false -o \ first-boot-script-svc-manifest.xml   ...as described here, and place it into the directory hierarchy above. But before you place it into the directory, make sure to inspect the manifest and adjust the appropriate service dependencies.  That is to say, you want to properly specify what milestone should be reached before your service runs.  There's a <dependency> section that looks like this, before you modify it: <dependency restart_on="none" type="service" name="multi_user_dependency" grouping="require_all"> <service_fmri value="svc:/milestone/multi-user"/>  </dependency>  So if you'd like to have your service run AFTER the multi-user-server milestone has been reached (i.e. later, as multi-user-server has more dependencies then multi-user and our intent to reboot the system may have significant ramifications if done prematurely), you would modify that section to read:  <dependency restart_on="none" type="service" name="multi_user_server_dependency" grouping="require_all"> <service_fmri value="svc:/milestone/multi-user-server"/>  </dependency> Save the file and validate it: $ svccfg validate first-boot-script-svc-manifest.xml Assuming there are no errors returned, copy the file over into the directory hierarchy: $ cp first-boot-script-svc-manifest.xml proto/lib/svc/manifest/site Now that we've created the service manifest (.xml), create the package manifest (.p5m) file named: first-boot-script.p5m.  Populate it as follows: set name=pkg.fmri value=first-boot-script-AT-1-DOT-0,5.11-0 set name=pkg.summary value="AI first-boot script" set name=pkg.description value="Script that runs at first boot after AI installation" set name=info.classification value=\ "org.opensolaris.category.2008:System/Administration and Configuration" file lib/svc/manifest/site/first-boot-script-svc-manifest.xml \ path=lib/svc/manifest/site/first-boot-script-svc-manifest.xml owner=root \ group=sys mode=0444 dir path=opt/site owner=root group=sys mode=0755 file opt/site/first-boot-script.sh path=opt/site/first-boot-script.sh \ owner=root group=sys mode=0555 Now we are going to publish this package into a IPS repository. If you don't have one yet, don't worry. You have 2 choices: You can either  publish this package into your mirror of the Oracle Solaris IPS repo or create your own customized repo.  The best practice is to create your own customized repo, leaving your mirror of the Oracle Solaris IPS repo untouched.  From this point, you have 2 choices as well - you can either create a repo that will be accessible by your clients via HTTP or via NFS.  Since HTTP is how the default Solaris repo is accessed, we'll go with HTTP for your own IPS repo.   This nice and comprehensive How To by Albert White describes how to create multiple internal IPS repos for Solaris 11. We'll zero in on the basic elements for our needs here: We'll create the IPS repo directory structure hanging off a separate ZFS file system, and we'll tie it into an instance of pkg.depotd. We do this because we want our IPS repo to be accessible to our AI clients through HTTP, and the pkg.depotd SMF service bundled in Solaris 11 can help us do this. We proceed as follows: # zfs create rpool/export/MyIPSrepo # pkgrepo create /export/MyIPSrepo # svccfg -s pkg/server add MyIPSrepo # svccfg -s pkg/server:MyIPSrepo addpg pkg application # svccfg -s pkg/server:MyIPSrepo setprop pkg/port=10081 # svccfg -s pkg/server:MyIPSrepo setprop pkg/inst_root=/export/MyIPSrepo # svccfg -s pkg/server:MyIPSrepo addpg general framework # svccfg -s pkg/server:MyIPSrepo addpropvalue general/complete astring: MyIPSrepo # svccfg -s pkg/server:MyIPSrepo addpropvalue general/enabled boolean: true # svccfg -s pkg/server:MyIPSrepo setprop pkg/readonly=true # svccfg -s pkg/server:MyIPSrepo setprop pkg/proxy_base = astring: http://your_internal_websrvr/MyIPSrepo # svccfg -s pkg/server:MyIPSrepo setprop pkg/threads = 200 # svcadm refresh application/pkg/server:MyIPSrepo # svcadm enable application/pkg/server:MyIPSrepo Now that the IPS repo is created, we need to publish our package into it: # pkgsend publish -d ./proto -s /export/MyIPSrepo first-boot-script.p5m If you find yourself making changes to your script, remember to up-rev the version in the .p5m file (which is your IPS package manifest), and re-publish the IPS package. Next, you need to go to your AI install server (which might be the same machine) and modify the AI manifest to include a reference to your newly created package.  We do that by listing an additional publisher, which would look like this (replacing the IP address and port with your own, from the "svccfg" commands up above): <publisher name="firstboot"> <origin name="http://192.168.1.222:10081"/> </publisher>  Further down, in the  <software_data action="install">  section add: <name>pkg:/first-boot-script</name> Make sure to update your Automated Install service with the new AI manifest via installadm update-manifest command.  Don't forget to boot your client from the network to watch the entire process unfold and your script get tested.  Once the system makes the initial reboot, the first boot script will be executed and whatever logic you've specified in it should be executed, too, followed by a nice reboot. When the system comes up, your service should stay in a disabled state, as specified by the tailing lines of your SMF script - this is normal and should be left as is as it helps provide an auditing trail for you.   Because the reboot is quite a significant action for the system, you may want to add additional logic to the script that actually places and then checks for presence of certain lock files in order to avoid doing a reboot unnecessarily. You may also want to, alternatively, remove the SMF service entirely - if you're unsure of the potential for someone to try and accidentally enable that service -- eventhough its role in life is to only run once upon the system's first boot. That is how I spent a good chunk of my pre-Halloween time this week, hope yours was just as SPARCkly^H^H^H^H fun!    

    Read the article

  • ProFTPd server on Ubuntu getting access denied message when successfully authenticated?

    - by exxoid
    I have a Ubuntu box with a ProFTPD 1.3.4a Server, when I try to log in via my FTP Client I cannot do anything as it does not allow me to list directories; I have tried logging in as root and as a regular user and tried accessing different paths within the FTP Server. The error I get in my FTP Client is: Status: Retrieving directory listing... Command: CDUP Response: 250 CDUP command successful Command: PWD Response: 257 "/var" is the current directory Command: PASV Response: 227 Entering Passive Mode (172,16,4,22,237,205). Command: MLSD Response: 550 Access is denied. Error: Failed to retrieve directory listing Any idea? Here is the config of my proftpd: # # /etc/proftpd/proftpd.conf -- This is a basic ProFTPD configuration file. # To really apply changes, reload proftpd after modifications, if # it runs in daemon mode. It is not required in inetd/xinetd mode. # # Includes DSO modules Include /etc/proftpd/modules.conf # Set off to disable IPv6 support which is annoying on IPv4 only boxes. UseIPv6 off # If set on you can experience a longer connection delay in many cases. IdentLookups off ServerName "Drupal Intranet" ServerType standalone ServerIdent on "FTP Server ready" DeferWelcome on # Set the user and group that the server runs as User nobody Group nogroup MultilineRFC2228 on DefaultServer on ShowSymlinks on TimeoutNoTransfer 600 TimeoutStalled 600 TimeoutIdle 1200 DisplayLogin welcome.msg DisplayChdir .message true ListOptions "-l" DenyFilter \*.*/ # Use this to jail all users in their homes # DefaultRoot ~ # Users require a valid shell listed in /etc/shells to login. # Use this directive to release that constrain. # RequireValidShell off # Port 21 is the standard FTP port. Port 21 # In some cases you have to specify passive ports range to by-pass # firewall limitations. Ephemeral ports can be used for that, but # feel free to use a more narrow range. # PassivePorts 49152 65534 # If your host was NATted, this option is useful in order to # allow passive tranfers to work. You have to use your public # address and opening the passive ports used on your firewall as well. # MasqueradeAddress 1.2.3.4 # This is useful for masquerading address with dynamic IPs: # refresh any configured MasqueradeAddress directives every 8 hours <IfModule mod_dynmasq.c> # DynMasqRefresh 28800 </IfModule> # To prevent DoS attacks, set the maximum number of child processes # to 30. If you need to allow more than 30 concurrent connections # at once, simply increase this value. Note that this ONLY works # in standalone mode, in inetd mode you should use an inetd server # that allows you to limit maximum number of processes per service # (such as xinetd) MaxInstances 30 # Set the user and group that the server normally runs at. # Umask 022 is a good standard umask to prevent new files and dirs # (second parm) from being group and world writable. Umask 022 022 # Normally, we want files to be overwriteable. AllowOverwrite on # Uncomment this if you are using NIS or LDAP via NSS to retrieve passwords: # PersistentPasswd off # This is required to use both PAM-based authentication and local passwords AuthPAMConfig proftpd AuthOrder mod_auth_pam.c* mod_auth_unix.c # Be warned: use of this directive impacts CPU average load! # Uncomment this if you like to see progress and transfer rate with ftpwho # in downloads. That is not needed for uploads rates. # UseSendFile off TransferLog /var/log/proftpd/xferlog SystemLog /var/log/proftpd/proftpd.log # Logging onto /var/log/lastlog is enabled but set to off by default #UseLastlog on # In order to keep log file dates consistent after chroot, use timezone info # from /etc/localtime. If this is not set, and proftpd is configured to # chroot (e.g. DefaultRoot or <Anonymous>), it will use the non-daylight # savings timezone regardless of whether DST is in effect. #SetEnv TZ :/etc/localtime <IfModule mod_quotatab.c> QuotaEngine off </IfModule> <IfModule mod_ratio.c> Ratios off </IfModule> # Delay engine reduces impact of the so-called Timing Attack described in # http://www.securityfocus.com/bid/11430/discuss # It is on by default. <IfModule mod_delay.c> DelayEngine on </IfModule> <IfModule mod_ctrls.c> ControlsEngine off ControlsMaxClients 2 ControlsLog /var/log/proftpd/controls.log ControlsInterval 5 ControlsSocket /var/run/proftpd/proftpd.sock </IfModule> <IfModule mod_ctrls_admin.c> AdminControlsEngine off </IfModule> # # Alternative authentication frameworks # #Include /etc/proftpd/ldap.conf #Include /etc/proftpd/sql.conf # # This is used for FTPS connections # #Include /etc/proftpd/tls.conf # # Useful to keep VirtualHost/VirtualRoot directives separated # #Include /etc/proftpd/virtuals.con # A basic anonymous configuration, no upload directories. # <Anonymous ~ftp> # User ftp # Group nogroup # # We want clients to be able to login with "anonymous" as well as "ftp" # UserAlias anonymous ftp # # Cosmetic changes, all files belongs to ftp user # DirFakeUser on ftp # DirFakeGroup on ftp # # RequireValidShell off # # # Limit the maximum number of anonymous logins # MaxClients 10 # # # We want 'welcome.msg' displayed at login, and '.message' displayed # # in each newly chdired directory. # DisplayLogin welcome.msg # DisplayChdir .message # # # Limit WRITE everywhere in the anonymous chroot # <Directory *> # <Limit WRITE> # DenyAll # </Limit> # </Directory> # # # Uncomment this if you're brave. # # <Directory incoming> # # # Umask 022 is a good standard umask to prevent new files and dirs # # # (second parm) from being group and world writable. # # Umask 022 022 # # <Limit READ WRITE> # # DenyAll # # </Limit> # # <Limit STOR> # # AllowAll # # </Limit> # # </Directory> # # </Anonymous> # Include other custom configuration files Include /etc/proftpd/conf.d/ UseReverseDNS off <Global> RootLogin on UseFtpUsers on ServerIdent on DefaultChdir /var/www DeleteAbortedStores on LoginPasswordPrompt on AccessGrantMsg "You have been authenticated successfully." </Global> Any idea what could be wrong? Thanks for your help!

    Read the article

  • 11gR2 Agent ??

    - by Allen Gao
    ??:????oracle 11gR2 ???(Grid Infrastructure,????GI) ??? agent????,?? agent???,???agent??,??????????????:11.2.0.1??????    ?????10gR2 crs ????????????????10gR2 ??,crsd ??????????????????,crsd ?????racg??,??racg?????????,??racgvip ??????vip?????????,???racg??????????,????????????11gR2 GI??, agent ??????????GI??????????,?????agent ???????????,?????    ??????agent??????????1.????????daemon???agent ??????gipc, gpnp? ?ohasd ???orarootagent???2.Agent?????????,???HA(High Available)??.3.Ohasd ??????agent        cssdagent(??agent????“crsctl stat res –t –init” ????ora.cssd )        orarootagent        oraagent        cssdmonitor    Crsd ??????agent        orarootagent        Oraagent        ??????agent.??:??oracle?grid?????????oraagent??????????? oraagent_grid????ora.asm, oraagent_oracle??ora.<database_name>.db???     ?????agent?????????????,agent ????EP(Entry Point),??????????????       Start:????       Stop:????       Check:???????,???????????,?agent???GI,??????????       Clean:????,????????????????,???????failover?????       Abort:?????    ??????EP????,????????????,????????????????       ONLINE:????????online??       OFFLINE:????????offline?????offline??,?????planed offline ?unplaned offline?Planed offline??GI?????????offline??,??????GI?????(srvctl, crsctl)???????,????,GI?????????offline??,????????????GI???????,??planed offline???,??target????????offline??,????,??????target???offline???GI stacks,?????auto_start?????always,??,??????????(??target??,???auto_start?????,???oracle????Oracle Clusterware Administration and Deployment Guide 11g Release 2)???unplaned offline,?????GI???????,????sqlplus???????,??????,GI???????????offline??,???target?????online,??,???????GI???????,???????auto_start?????never?       UNKNOWN:??,?????unknown?????????,agent?????????check?       PARTIAL:??????,?????intermediate??? ??????agent?????????check,??????????       FAILED:???????????????,??????,agent?????clean EP,?????????????failover?restart???    ??,??????????????agent?????????????? Normal 0 7.8 ? 0 2 false false false EN-US ZH-CN X-NONE MicrosoftInternetExplorer4 DefSemiHidden="true" DefQFormat="false" DefPriority="99" LatentStyleCount="267" UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Normal"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="heading 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Title"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Subtitle"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Strong"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Emphasis"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Table Grid"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="No Spacing"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Shading"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light List"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Grid"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Dark List"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Shading"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful List"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Grid"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Shading Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light List Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Grid Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 1 Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 2 Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 1 Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="List Paragraph"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Quote"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Intense Quote"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 2 Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 1 Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 2 Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 3 Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Dark List Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Shading Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful List Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Grid Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Shading Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light List Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Grid Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 1 Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 2 Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 1 Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 2 Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 1 Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 2 Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 3 Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Dark List Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Shading Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful List Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Grid Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Shading Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light List Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Grid Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 1 Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 2 Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 1 Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 2 Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 1 Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 2 Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 3 Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Dark List Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Shading Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful List Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Grid Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Shading Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light List Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Grid Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 1 Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 2 Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 1 Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 2 Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 1 Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 2 Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 3 Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Dark List Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Shading Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful List Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Grid Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Shading Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light List Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Grid Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 1 Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 2 Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 1 Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 2 Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 1 Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 2 Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 3 Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Dark List Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Shading Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful List Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Grid Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Shading Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light List Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Grid Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 1 Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 2 Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 1 Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 2 Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 1 Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 2 Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 3 Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Dark List Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Shading Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful List Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Grid Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Subtle Emphasis"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Intense Emphasis"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Subtle Reference"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Intense Reference"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Book Title"/ /* Style Definitions */ table.MsoNormalTable {mso-style-name:????; mso-tstyle-rowband-size:0; mso-tstyle-colband-size:0; mso-style-noshow:yes; mso-style-priority:99; mso-style-qformat:yes; mso-style-parent:""; mso-padding-alt:0cm 5.4pt 0cm 5.4pt; mso-para-margin:0cm; mso-para-margin-bottom:.0001pt; mso-pagination:widow-orphan; font-size:10.5pt; mso-bidi-font-size:11.0pt; font-family:"Calibri","sans-serif"; mso-ascii-font-family:Calibri; mso-ascii-theme-font:minor-latin; mso-fareast-font-family:??; mso-fareast-theme-font:minor-fareast; mso-hansi-font-family:Calibri; mso-hansi-theme-font:minor-latin; mso-bidi-font-family:"Times New Roman"; mso-bidi-theme-font:minor-bidi; mso-font-kerning:1.0pt;}     ??,???agent???trace????????????,agent?trace ??????GRID_HOME/log/<host>/agent?,???????????            GRID_HOME/log/<host>/agent /ohasd/orarootagent_root  <– ohasd???orarootagent??            GRID_HOME/log/<host>/agent/ohasd/oraagent_grid  <– ohasd???oraagent??            GRID_HOME/log/<host>/agent/ohasd/oracssdagent_root  <– ohasd???cssdagent??            GRID_HOME/log/<host>/agent/ohasd/oracssdmonitor_root  <– ohasd???cssdmonitor??            GRID_HOME/log/<host>/agent/crsd/oraagent_grid  <– crsd???oraagent??,owner?grid            GRID_HOME/log/<host>/agent/crsd/oraagent_oracle  <– crsd???oraagent??,owner?oracle            GRID_HOME/log/<host>/agent/crsd/orarootagent_root  <–crsd???orarootagent??    ??,????????agent???????????            ??alert log(Grid_home/log/<hostname>/alert<hostname>.log)            Grid_home/log/<hostname>/ohasd/ohasd.log            Grid_home/log/<hostname>/crsd/crsd.log     ????agent????????,??,?????????????,??????????????agent???????,??Agent????????,????????????Agent??crash,?????,?????core??(Grid_home/log/<hostname>/agent/{ohasd|crsd}/<agent?>_<???>)????????(Grid_home/log/<hostname>/agent/{ohasd|crsd}/<agent?>_<???>/<agent?>_<???>OUT.log)? v\:* {behavior:url(#default#VML);} o\:* {behavior:url(#default#VML);} w\:* {behavior:url(#default#VML);} .shape {behavior:url(#default#VML);} Normal 0 7.8 ? 0 2 false false false EN-US ZH-CN X-NONE MicrosoftInternetExplorer4 DefSemiHidden="true" DefQFormat="false" DefPriority="99" LatentStyleCount="267" UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Normal"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="heading 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Title"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Subtitle"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Strong"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Emphasis"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Table Grid"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="No Spacing"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Shading"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light List"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Grid"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Dark List"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Shading"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful List"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Grid"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Shading Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light List Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Grid Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 1 Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 2 Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 1 Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="List Paragraph"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Quote"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Intense Quote"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 2 Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 1 Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 2 Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 3 Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Dark List Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Shading Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful List Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Grid Accent 1"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Shading Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light List Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Grid Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 1 Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 2 Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 1 Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 2 Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 1 Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 2 Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 3 Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Dark List Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Shading Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful List Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Grid Accent 2"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Shading Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light List Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Grid Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 1 Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 2 Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 1 Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 2 Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 1 Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 2 Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 3 Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Dark List Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Shading Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful List Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Grid Accent 3"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Shading Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light List Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Grid Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 1 Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 2 Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 1 Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 2 Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 1 Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 2 Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 3 Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Dark List Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Shading Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful List Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Grid Accent 4"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Shading Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light List Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Grid Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 1 Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 2 Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 1 Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 2 Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 1 Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 2 Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 3 Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Dark List Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Shading Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful List Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Grid Accent 5"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Shading Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light List Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Light Grid Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 1 Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Shading 2 Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 1 Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium List 2 Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 1 Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 2 Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Medium Grid 3 Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Dark List Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Shading Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful List Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" Name="Colorful Grid Accent 6"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Subtle Emphasis"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Intense Emphasis"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Subtle Reference"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Intense Reference"/ UnhideWhenUsed="false" QFormat="true" Name="Book Title"/ /* Style Definitions */ table.MsoNormalTable {mso-style-name:????; mso-tstyle-rowband-size:0; mso-tstyle-colband-size:0; mso-style-noshow:yes; mso-style-priority:99; mso-style-qformat:yes; mso-style-parent:""; mso-padding-alt:0cm 5.4pt 0cm 5.4pt; mso-para-margin:0cm; mso-para-margin-bottom:.0001pt; mso-pagination:widow-orphan; font-size:10.5pt; mso-bidi-font-size:11.0pt; font-family:"Calibri","sans-serif"; mso-ascii-font-family:Calibri; mso-ascii-theme-font:minor-latin; mso-fareast-font-family:??; mso-fareast-theme-font:minor-fareast; mso-hansi-font-family:Calibri; mso-hansi-theme-font:minor-latin; mso-bidi-font-family:"Times New Roman"; mso-bidi-theme-font:minor-bidi; mso-font-kerning:1.0pt;}

    Read the article

facebook twitter digg google delicious technorati stumbleupon myspace wordpress linkedin gmail igoogle windows live tumblr viadeo yahoo buzz yahoo mail yahoo bookmarks favorites email print

< Previous Page | 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589  | Next Page >